Owner’s Manual. 2021 INSIGHT. Event Data Recorders. ... 2021 Honda Insight Owner’s Manual © 2020 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved.
This owner's manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and. Canada. The information and specifications included in this publication were.
Owner's Manual
2021 INSIGHT
Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: · How various systems in your vehicle were operating; · Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened; · How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and, · How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
Software End User License Agreement
Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner's Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Privacy Notice This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
3 DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.
Contents
This owner's manual should be considered a permanent part of the 2 Safe Driving P. 41
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
For Safe Driving P. 42
Seat Belts P. 46
Airbags P. 53
This owner's manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
Images throughout this owner's manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.
2 Instrument Panel P. 83
Indicators P. 84
Gauges and Driver Information Interface P. 133
2 Controls P. 169
Clock P. 170 Moonroof* P. 195 Adjusting the Seats P. 214
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 172
2 Features P. 239
Audio System P. 240
Audio System Basic Operation P. 247, 268
Customized Features P. 365, 372
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver* P. 392
This owner's manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.
2 Driving P. 447
Before Driving P. 448 Parking Your Vehicle P. 549
Towing a Trailer P. 453 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 554
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.
2 Maintenance P. 561
Before Performing Maintenance P. 562 Maintenance MinderTM P. 565 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 589 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 604
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 613
Tools P. 614
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 615
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 643 Fuses P. 651
When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 659
2 Information P. 661
Specifications P. 662 Emissions Testing P. 667
Identification Numbers P. 664 Warranty Coverages P. 668
Child Safety P. 68
Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 81
Safety Labels P. 82
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 186 Security System P. 189 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 196 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 222
Opening and Closing the Windows P. 192 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 212 Climate Control System P. 232
Audio Error Messages P. 338
General Information on the Audio System P. 343
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 395, 420 Refuel Recommend P. 445
When Driving P. 454 Refueling P. 557
Honda Sensing® P. 487
Braking P. 539
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 560
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 572 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 592 Cleaning P. 605
Replacing Light Bulbs P. 585 12-Volt Battery P. 601 Accessories and Modifications P. 611
Remote Transmitter Care P. 603
Power System Won't Start P. 635 Emergency Towing P. 657
Jump Starting P. 638
Overheating P. 641
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 658
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 665 Authorized Manuals P. 671
Reporting Safety Defects P. 666 Customer Service Information P. 672
Contents
Quick Reference Guide P. 6 Safe Driving P. 41
Instrument Panel P. 83 Controls P. 169 Features P. 239 Driving P. 447
Maintenance P. 561 Handling the Unexpected P. 613
Information P. 661 Index P. 674
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
TRIP Button (P 138) Brightness Control (P 210)
System Indicators (P 84) Gauges (P 133) Driver Information Interface (P 136) Hazard Warning Button Audio System (P 240) Navigation System*
() See the Navigation System Manual
Climate Control System (P 232) Front Seat Heater Buttons* (P 230)
Rear Defogger (P 209) Heated Door Mirror Button (P 209) Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
(P 65)
POWER Button (P 196)
(Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 476) Safety Support Switch (P 485, 493, 527) Fuel Fill Door Release Button (P 558)
6
Quick Reference Guide
Headlights/Turn Signals (P 199) Fog Lights* (P 203) Deceleration Paddle Selector (-) (P 470) Left Selector Wheel (P 137) (home) Button (P 137) Horn (Press an area around .) MAIN Button (P 500) Deceleration Paddle Selector (+) (P 470)
Wipers/Washers (P 207) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow Buttons (P 509)
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button
(P 519)
Interval Button (P 510)
Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 211) Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Buttons (P 395, 420) Voice Control Buttons* (P 293) Audio Remote Controls (P 243)
* Not available on all models 7
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
8
Power Window Switches (P 192) Master Door Lock Switch (P 184) Door Mirror Controls (P 213) Driver's Front Airbag (P 56) Rearview Mirror (P 212) HomeLink® Buttons* (P 393) Shift Button
Electronic Gear Selector (P 463)
Passenger's Front Airbag (P 56)
Glove Box (P 224) Accessory Power Socket (P 228) USB Port(s) (P 241) EV Button (P 14) SPORT Button (P 469) ECON Button (P 473) Automatic Brake Hold Button (P 544) Electric Parking Brake Switch (P 539)
Rear Seat Heater Buttons* (P 231) Interior Fuse Box (P 655) Hood Release Handle (P 573) Trunk Opener (P 186)
Quick Reference Guide
Side Curtain Airbags (P 63) Interior Light (P 222) Grab Handle Coat Hook (P 229)
Coat Hooks (P 229) Seat Belts (P 46)
Map Lights (P 223) Moonroof Switch*
(P 195)
Sun Visors Vanity Mirrors
Front Seat (P 214) Side Airbags (P 61)
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 75) Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 77) Rear Seats (P 217) LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 73)
* Not available on all models 9
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
10
Maintenance Under the Hood (P 572) Windshield Wipers (P 207, 589) Power Door Mirrors (P 213) Side Turn Signal Lights* (P 200, 585) Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 175) Headlights (P 200, 585) Front Turn Signal Lights (P 199, 585) Front Side Marker Lights (P 200, 585) Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P 199, 203, 585) Fog Lights* (P 203, 585) Tires (P 592, 615, 621)
High-Mount Brake Light (P 588) Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 186) Emergency Trunk Opener (P 188) Trunk Release Button* (P 187) Rear License Plate Light (P 588)
Multi-View Rear Camera (P 554) Back-Up Lights (P 587) Taillights (P 587) Brake Lights (P 586) Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 586) Rear Side Marker Lights/Taillights (P 586) How to Refuel (P 558)
Quick Reference Guide
SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi-Mode Drive)
Your SPORT HYBRID i-MMD vehicle uses both an electric motor and a gasoline engine as propulsion sources, with the electric motor receiving electricity from an internal High Voltage battery or internal generator. The High Voltage battery is charged from the generator driven by the engine or regenerative braking. When driving, your vehicle is propelled exclusively by the electric motor, exclusively by the gasoline engine, or by a combination of the two. The system selects which propulsion source is most appropriate and automatically switches to it. Under certain circumstances, pressing the EV button can manually enable EV (driven only on electricity) mode. Energy efficiency As with a gasoline-powered vehicle, hybrid vehicle fuel efficiency and driving range is most impacted by your driving style. Aggressive acceleration and high-speed driving can easily trigger the system to switch the propulsion source to the gasoline-powered engine. In addition, heavy climate control system use negatively affects vehicle range and efficiency. Either of these use patterns will more quickly reduce the High Voltage battery's state of charge. Battery types There are two types of batteries used in this vehicle; a standard 12-volt battery that powers the airbags, the interior and exterior lights, and other standard 12-volt systems; and a high voltage battery that is used to power the propulsion motor and recharge the 12-volt battery.
* Not available on all models 11
Quick Reference Guide
SPORT HYBRID i-MMD SYSTEM MAIN COMPONENTS
Gasoline Engine Runs the generator and under certain
conditions, drives the wheels directly.
Generator Starts the engine and generates electric power
when driven by the gasoline engine to supply electricity to power the electric motor and/or to charge the High Voltage battery.
Electric Motor Provides propulsion to drive the wheels in
conjunction with the gasoline engine in certain conditions, and provides electricity to the High Voltage battery through regenerative braking.
High Voltage Battery Provides electrical storage and serves
as a power source for the electric motor. Learning about the High Voltage battery's characteristics will help you get the best handling and maximize the range of your electric vehicle. (P486)
High Voltage Battery Charge Level Indicator Displays
battery state of charge. When the indicator:
· Displays two or less segments, EV mode is no longer available. · Displays ten segments, battery charge level is full.
High Voltage Battery
Generator & Electric Motor Gasoline Engine
12
Vehicle Speed
Time
Quick Reference Guide
Operating mode
Electric Vehicle (EV)
Hybrid (HV)
Engine (Direct Drive)
Regeneration
Driving Speed
Stopped or driven at low speeds: Driven in high-load conditions
Only the electric motor
(e.g., when accelerating, going
provides propulsion to the uphill):
wheels.
The Electric Motor provides
propulsion to the wheels.
The gasoline engine drives the
generator, supplying
electricity to the electric
motor for added propulsion
or to the High Voltage battery
for charging.
Driven in high-speed, low-load conditions: The gasoline engine provides
propulsion to the wheels. The High Voltage battery
supplies electricity to the electric motor for added propulsion. The electric motor provides electricity to the High Voltage battery through regenerative braking.
The accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is decelerating. The electric motor provides
electricity to the High Voltage battery through regenerative braking.
Power Flow Monitor
Electric motor Generator Engine
High Voltage battery
Stopped/Running Stopped Stopped
Discharge
Running Generating
Running
Charging/Discharge
Generating/Running No Output Running
Charging/Discharge
Regenerating Stopped/No Output Stopped/No Output
Charging
13
Quick Reference Guide
EV Button
EV mode is enabled by pressing the EV button near the shift button.
The EV mode indicator comes on in the instrument panel when EV mode is enabled.
Press the EV button again to switch back to HV mode.
Press
Some conditions, such as a low High Voltage battery level and a high vehicle speed, may keep the system from manually switching into EV mode. The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface with the button pressed when EV mode is disabled.
Shifts in vehicle, driving or road conditions may automatically cancel EV mode and switch back to HV mode.
A message will appear on the driver information interface and EV mode may be canceled automatically when: The High Voltage battery charge level is low. Your vehicle speed is too high. Your vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h) while the engine is in warming-up operation. You fully depress the accelerator pedal. You are driving on hilly road.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages (P107)
14
Quick Reference Guide
Regenerative Energy and Regenerative Braking
When regenerative braking is in operation
Motor
When the vehicle is decelerating or descending a hill, the electric motor acts as a generator that recovers a portion of the energy that was used to accelerate the vehicle. The regenerative force that the electric motor applies to the wheels when it is in regenerative mode helps to slow the vehicle down in a manner similar to engine braking which is used on conventional vehicles. If you want to slow the vehicle down at a faster rate without using the brakes, you can use the deceleration paddle selector to increase the resistive force.
High Voltage Battery
15
Quick Reference Guide
Auto Engine Stop/Start Your vehicle's gasoline engine automatically stops running during vehicle operation or restarts while the vehicle is stationary when it is appropriate. In the following cases, however, auto engine stop may not activate.
· The vehicle momentarily needs additional power for aggressive acceleration, or driving uphill or at high speed. · The climate control system is in heavy use. · The High Voltage battery temperature is high or low.
Sounds Unique to the SPORT HYBRID i-MMD System When you first start driving this vehicle, you will likely hear some unfamiliar sounds, particularly when you turn on the power system, or while you are driving or accelerating from a stop. Some of these sounds are unique to this vehicle's powertrain, fuel, and climate control systems; others are similar to sounds generated by conventional automobiles that typically are masked by louder noises absent from a vehicle of this design. These sounds are not a cause for concern, and you will soon recognize them as normal and thus be able to detect any new or unusual noise should one develop. After shutting off the engine, you may hear certain noises coming from the vehicle. Here's the lowdown:
· Noise from Under Vehicle: This noise is caused by the vacuum pump inside the fuel evaporation leakage check module (ELCM).
Depending on conditions, the pump will come on for about 15 minutes about 5 to 10 hours after engine shutoff. This noise is just normal vehicle operation and doesn't indicate a vehicle problem.
16
Safety Precautions
Do not cover the air intake.
Air Intake If the air intake is obstructed during vehicle operation, the High Voltage battery can become too hot. To protect the battery, the system may start to limit the battery's output and cause the power system and 12-volt battery charging system indicators to come on.
Do not touch the High Voltage system
Attempting to take a High Voltage system component apart or disconnect one of its wires can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure that any maintenance or repairs to the High Voltage system is performed by a dealer.
If a crash occurs
Be careful of electric shock hazard.
uIf a severe crash damages your vehicle's High Voltage system, there is a possibility of electrical shock due to exposed High Voltage components or wires. If this happens, do not touch any of the High Voltage system components or any of its orange wires.
Avoid contact with High Voltage battery fluid.
uThe High Voltage battery contains a flammable electrolyte that could leak as a result of a severe crash. Avoid skin or eye contact with the electrolyte as it is corrosive. If you accidentally come into contact with the electrolyte, rinse the exposed skin or flush your eyes with copious amounts of water for at least five minutes, and seek medical attention immediately.
Use a fire extinguisher for an electrical fire.
uAttempting to extinguish an electrical fire with even a small quantity of water, from a garden hose for instance, can be dangerous.
Anytime the vehicle is damaged in a crash, have it repaired by a dealer.
Emergency Shutdown System for the High Voltage System
If the vehicle is involved in a crash, the emergency shutdown system will activate depending on the severity of the impact. When the system activates, the High Voltage system automatically shuts down, and the vehicle can no longer move under its own power. To return the High Voltage system back to normal operation, consult a dealer.
Honda collects and recycles High Voltage batteries used in its vehicles consult a dealer for more information.
17
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Eco Assist® System (P 473)
Ambient Meter
With SPORT mode off, the color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner.
The message is displayed for a few seconds when the ECON button is pressed.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 100)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
18
ECON Button
(P 473) Helps maximize
fuel economy.
Quick Reference Guide
Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
Comes on when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
Drive Cycle Score
Eco Drive Display
Keep the vehicle icon near the center of the circle.
Fuel economy is: Worse
Better
Best
Lifetime Points
Better
Worse
Aggressive Deceleration
Moderate
Slow Acceleration/
Deceleration Deceleration
Moderate
Aggressive
Acceleration Acceleration
19
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving (P 41)
Airbags (P 53)
Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 68)
All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 81)
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Seat Belts (P 46)
Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat. Check that your passengers are wearing
Before Driving Checklist (P 45)
their seat belts correctly.
Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.
20
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel (P 83)
Indicators (P 84)/Driver Information Interface (P 136)/Gauges (P 133)
High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
POWER/CHARGE Gauge
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Driver Information Interface
Immobilizer System Indicator/ Security System Alarm Indicator
Deceleration Paddle Selector Indicator
Shift Position Indicator/ Transmission System Indicator
21
Quick Reference Guide
Controls (P 169)
Clock (P170)
Models with color audio
Models with Display Audio
To adjust time
a Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK
button.
b Rotate
.
to change hour, then press
c Rotate to change minute, then
press .
d Select Set, then press .
These indications are used to show how to
operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
To adjust date
a Press , then select Settings. b Select System, then Day & Time. c Select Set Date & Time. d Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.
22
e Select Set Date or Set Time. f Adjust the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting 3 / 4 .
g Select Save to set the date or time.
The clock is automatically updated through the audio system.
POWER Button (P196)
Press the button to change the vehicle's power mode.
Quick Reference Guide
Turn Signals (P 199)
Turn Signal Control Lever Right
Left
Lights (P 200)
Light Control Switches High Beam Low Beam
Flashing
Wipers and Washers
(P 207)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever Adjustment Ring (-: Low Sensitivity*1 (- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2
(+: High Sensitivity*1 (+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: Cleaning the windshield Driving through a car wash No rain present
Steering Wheel (P 211)
To adjust, pull the adjustment lever toward you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.
MIST OFF AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically INT*2: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe
To adjust To lock
*1:Models with automatic intermittent wipers
*2:Models without automatic intermittent wipers
23
Quick Reference Guide
Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside (P 183)
Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.
Unlocking and opening the driver's door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.
Trunk (P 186)
Press and hold the trunk opener on the driver's door to unlock and open the trunk.
Press the trunk release button on the remote to unlock and open the trunk.
Press the trunk release button* on the trunk lid to unlock and open the trunk.
Power Door Mirrors (P 213)
With the power mode in ON, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror. Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows (P 192)
With the power mode in ON, open and
close the power windows. If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger's window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch. If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
passenger's window switch is disabled.
Indicator
Power Window Lock Button
Window Switch
Trunk Opener
24
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System (P 232)
Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Models without SYNC button
Dashboard vents
AUTO Button Temperature Control Dial
(Recirculation) Button (Windshield Defroster) Button
Models with SYNC button
Dashboard and floor vents
Floor vents
Floor and defroster vents
Fan Control Dial
(ON/OFF) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button MODE Control Button
Dashboard vents
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Driver's Side Temperature Control Dial AUTO Button
(ON/OFF) Button (Recirculation) Button
Dashboard and floor vents
Floor vents
Floor and defroster vents
MODE Control Button
Passenger's Side Temperature Control Dial SYNC (Synchronization) Button
Fan Control Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button
* Not available on all models 25
Quick Reference Guide
Features (P 239)
Audio Remote Controls
(P 243)
Models with color audio
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
SOURCE Button
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
Press to adjust the volume up/down. SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode:
FM1FM2AMUSB/iPodPandora®
Bluetooth® Audio.
/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Radio:Press
/
to change the
preset station. iPod, USB device, or Bluetooth® Audio:
Press
/
to skip to the
beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
USB device or Bluetooth® Audio:
Press and hold
/
to
change a folder/group.
Pandora®:
Press
to skip to the next
track. Press and hold
/
to select the next or previous track.
Models with Display Audio
(home) Button
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Left Selector Wheel
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons Press to adjust the volume up/down.
Left Selector Wheel When selecting the audio mode Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select Audio on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.
Roll up or down: To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector wheel:
FM
AM SiriusXM®*
USB1
USB2
Bluetooth® Audio
Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)
26
/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Radio: Press
/
to change the
preset station. iPod, USB device, Bluetooth® Audio or Smartphone Connection:
Press
/
to skip to the
beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. USB device:
Press and hold
/
to
change a folder.
* Not available on all models 27
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Audio System (P247, 268)
Models with color audio (P 247)
(Day/Night) Button RADIO Button MEDIA Button VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
(Seek/Skip) Button (Seek/Skip) Button
28
Audio/Information Screen
(Phone) Button (Sound) Button Selector Knob MENU/CLOCK Button (Back) Button Preset Buttons (1-6)
Quick Reference Guide
Models with Display Audio (P268) For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
Audio/Information Screen
(Home) Button (Back) Button (Day/Night) Button (Seek/Skip) Button (Seek/Skip) Button
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
29
Quick Reference Guide
Driving (P 447)
Electronic Gear Selector (P 463)
Select (P and depress the brake pedal when turning on the power.
Shift selection
Shift Position Indicator The shift position indicator and the shift button indicator indicate the current gear selection.
Shift Position Indicator
Park Press the (P button. Used when parking or before turning the power on or off. Transmission is locked. Reverse Pull back the (R button. Used when reversing. Neutral Press the (N button. Transmission is not locked.
30
Shift Button Indicator
Drive Press the (D button. Used for normal driving. The deceleration paddle selector can be used temporarily. The deceleration paddle selector can be used when SPORT mode is on.
Quick Reference Guide
Deceleration Paddle Selector (P470)
When you release the accelerator pedal, you can control the rate of deceleration
without releasing your hands from the steering wheel. Using the deceleration
paddle selector situated on the steering wheel, you can sequentially shift through
three stages of deceleration.
Pull the (+ selector for a few seconds when you want to cancel the deceleration
paddle selector. When SPORT mode is OFF
If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change temporarily, and the stage will appear in the instrument panel. When SPORT mode is ON If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change and the stage along with M will appear in the instrument panel.
When SPORT mode is OFF, the deceleration stage appears.
When SPORT mode is ON, the deceleration stage and M appear.
(- Paddle Selector
(+ Paddle Selector
Deceleration stage
31
Quick Reference Guide
CMBSTM On and Off
(P 493) When a possible collision is likely
unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision. The CMBSTM is turned on every time you turn on the power system. To turn the CMBSTM on or off, use the safety support switch.
VSA® On and Off (P 476)
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA® comes on automatically every time you turn on the power system.
To partially disable or fully restore VSA® function, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 478)
Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.
The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you turn on the power system.
A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.
32
Quick Reference Guide
Refueling (P 557)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher Fuel tank capacity: 10.6 US gal (40 L)
a Press the fuel fill door release button.
u Please Wait appears for a few seconds on the driver information interface.
b When the message changes to Ready, the fuel
fill door automatically opens.
c Turn the fuel fill cap slowly to remove the cap. d Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.
e After refueling, screw the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.
Fuel Fill Door Release Button
33
Quick Reference Guide
Honda Sensing® (P 487)
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located at the lower part of the front bumper and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
Front Sensor Camera
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
Radar Sensor
The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P 490)
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (P499)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P 517)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
(P 525)
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.
Traffic Sign Recognition System (P530)
Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit, your vehicle has just passed through, showing it on the driver information interface.
34
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance (P 561)
Under the Hood (P 572)
Check engine oil, engine coolant, inverter coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.
Check brake fluid.
a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
Wiper Blades (P 589)
Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then
raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you
can release the lever.
Tires (P 592)
Inspect tires and wheels regularly. Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter
driving.
Lights (P 585)
Inspect all lights regularly.
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
35
Quick Reference Guide
Handling the Unexpected (P 613)
Flat Tire (P 615)
Models with optional spare tire
Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the trunk.
Park in a safe location and repair the flat tire using the temporary tire repair kit.
Power System Won't
Start (P 635)
If the 12-volt battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.
Overheating (P 641)
Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Indicators Come On
(P 643) Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.
Blown Fuse (P 651)
Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Emergency Towing
(P 657) Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
36
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?
Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors?
Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver's door?
This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P547)
Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position.
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security.
The beeper sounds when: The power mode is in ACCESSORY. The exterior lights are left on.
37
Quick Reference Guide
Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?
Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?
Pressing the electric parking brake switch does not release the parking brake. Why?
I'm seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that?
The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock operating range before the door completely closes.
2 Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock®) (P177)
The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate the system.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P478)
38
Quick Reference Guide
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not release the parking brake automatically. Why?
Why does the shift position automatically change to (P when I open the driver's door to check for parking space lines when reversing?
Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal?
Fasten the driver's seat belt. Check if the transmission is in (P or (N. If so, select any other
position.
Fasten the driver's seat belt. Close the driver's door and manually change the shift
position.
2 When opening the driver's door (P466)
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
39
40
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ............. 42 Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 44 Safety Checklist ................................. 45
Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts........................ 46 Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 49 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 52
Airbags Airbag System Components............... 53 Types of Airbags ................................ 56 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 56
Side Airbags ...................................... 61 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 63 Airbag System Indicators.................... 64 Airbag Care ....................................... 67 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 68 Safety of Infants and Small Children.......70 Safety of Larger Children ................... 79 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 81 Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 82
41
For Safe Driving
Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.
Important Safety Precautions
Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.
Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.
Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.
Don't drink and drive Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
42
Safe Driving
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.
Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle Children, pets and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.
43
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
9
8
9
6 10 7
8 10
11
7
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
6 Seat Belts
7 Front Airbags
8 Side Airbags
9 Side Curtain Airbags
10 Door Locks
11 Seat Belt Tensioners
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.
44
Safe Driving
uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. · After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 182
· Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 214
· Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions P. 219
· Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 49
· Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 68
1Safety Checklist
If the door and/or trunk open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close all doors and the trunk tightly until the message disappears.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 107
45
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body.
The front passenger's and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 75
1About Your Seat Belts
3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.
If a passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt.
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.
46
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: · All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. · Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash. · Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. · Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
1About Your Seat Belts
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.
Seat Belt Reminder
The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts. If you set the power mode to ON and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened.
The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving until the seat belt is fastened.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound. The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 68
Continued
47
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
Safe Driving
48
Safe Driving
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 214
Pull out slowly.
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
Correct Seated Posture.
Latch Plate
Buckle
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in. Then smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.
2 About Your Seat Belts P. 46 2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 52
Continued
49
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
Lap belt as low as possible
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while pulling the shoulder anchor outward.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.
Pull outward
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.
50
Safe Driving
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag:
· When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
· When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
51
Safe Driving
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
· Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. · Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.
52
Airbags
Airbag System Components
8
10 9 8
7
11
6 8
8
8
Continued
8
53
Safe Driving
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
b Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
c Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
d An electronic control unit that, when the power mode is in ON, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.
e Automatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.
f Driver's seat position sensor. This sensor detects the driver's seat slide position to help determine the optimal deployment of the driver's airbag.
g Weight sensors in the front passenger's seat. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger's airbag.
h Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
j An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
k A rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.
54
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Important Facts About Your Airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.
1Important Facts About Your Airbags Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
55
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: · Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats. · Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs. · Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages.
1Types of Airbags The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary restraint system.
Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.
56
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won't interfere with the driver's visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
Continued
57
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection. When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.
58
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Advanced Airbags
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.
Passenger's Seat Weight Sensors
Driver's Seat Position Sensor
Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver's airbag.
The front passenger's advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger's airbag. For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passenger's airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not recognize him/her as an adult, see
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 65
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position sensor or the passenger's seat weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver's seating position or passenger's occupant classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.
2 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator P. 64
For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that:
· The occupant is sitting in an upright position,
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat back is not excessively reclined.
· The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
· The occupant's feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
· There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger's seat.
· Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat back
pocket.
· The steering wheel and passenger's side dashboard
is not obstructed by any object.
· No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
Continued
59
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger's seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger's seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger's airbag. Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger's seat if the airbag does not automatically deactivate.
1Advanced Airbags
· There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat back.
· There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger's seat.
· There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger's seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
· The floor mat behind the front passenger's seat is
hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
· The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 65
2 Floor Mats P. 606
60
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing Location
1Side Airbags Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.
Operation
When inflated
When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.
Side Airbag
Continued
61
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag. When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
62
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.
Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.
1Side Curtain Airbags To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.
Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
Continued
63
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the Driver information interface.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
When the power mode is set to ON The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
64
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
When the passenger front airbag off
U.S.
Canada
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
front passenger's airbag has been turned off.
This occurs if the seat is empty or when the
weight sensors determine that a small child or
infant is on the passenger seat.
Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 68
If the indicator is on in the event of a crash, the front passenger's airbag will not deploy. If your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger's knee airbag, this airbag will not deploy either.
1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that:
· The occupant is sitting in an upright position,
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat back is not excessively reclined.
· The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
· The occupant's feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
· There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger's seat.
· Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat back
pocket.
· No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat. · There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat back.
· There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger's seat.
· There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger's seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
· The floor mat behind the front passenger's seat is
hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
· The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
Continued
65
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
66
1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult, depending on physique and posture, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate the front passenger's airbag. If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set forth in the above bullet points are met. If the above conditions are met and the indicator is still on, then with the transmission in park, turn the ignition off and back on.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if:
· All of the above conditions are met, and the
indicator comes on with an adult seated in the front passenger seat.
· The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the indicator is on.
Safe Driving
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.
When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver's seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger's seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.
67
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: · An inflating front or side airbag can injure or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
· A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver's ability to safely control the vehicle.
· Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.
68
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
· Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
· Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
· Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
· Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
· Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
· Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 82
69
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safety of Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat manufacturer's weight or height limit for the seat, and the
infant is at least one year old.
Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
1Protecting Infants
3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag system.
2 Airbags P. 53
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the child's height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward-facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer's instructions before installation.
Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position: The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.
70
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Protecting Smaller Children
If a child is at least one year old and has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.
Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.
1Protecting Smaller Children
3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Continued
71
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer's use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
1Selecting a Child Seat Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner's manual for proper installation instructions.
Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: · The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. · The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. · The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
72
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child
seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the anchor marks affixed to the base
of the seat cushion.
2. Pull out the anchor covers under the marks
Marks
to expose the lower anchors.
Covers
Lower Anchors Rigid Type
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the child seat to the lower anchorages according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure that the lower anchorages are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
3 WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.
For your child's safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
Flexible Type
Continued
73
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Straight Top Tether Type
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Other Top Tether Type
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
4. Open the tether anchor cover behind the head restraint.
5. Route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
3 WARNING
Do not use the lower inner anchors of the outer rear seats to secure a LATCHcompatible child seat to the rear center seat, unless the manufacturer's instructions for that system permit the use of inner anchors with the stated spacing.
Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seat Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower anchors which are used to secure a LATCHcompatible child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not equipped with anchors of any kind. The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance between the two inner anchors is 15 inches (380 mm). LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the rear center seat. However, a system fitted with flexible-type attachments can be installed in the center seat, provided that the manufacturer's instructions for that system permit the use of the inner anchors with the stated spacing. Before seating a child, make sure that the system is properly attached to both the lower anchors and tether anchors.
74
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer's instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and check that the retractor has switched modes by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull out again until it is reset by removing the latch plate from the buckle. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the
way out, and repeat steps 3 4.
Continued
75
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
76
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Adding Security with a Tether
Tether Anchorage Points
A tether anchorage point is provided behind each rear seating position. If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.
1Adding Security with a Tether
Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats when using the seat belt or lower anchors.
Anchor Cover
Straight Top Tether Type in Outer Position
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Other Top Tether Type in Outer Position
Tether Strap Hook
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage point and lift the cover.
2. Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. 4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Anchor
Continued
77
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Straight Top Tether Type in Center Position
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Other Top Tether Type in Center Position
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
78
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safety of Larger Children
Protecting Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
Checklist
· Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
· Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
· Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
· Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
1Safety of Larger Children
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.
Continued
79
Safe Driving
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Booster Seats
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the child's safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer's recommendations.
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.
Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: · Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual. · Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. · Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. · Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.
Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.
80
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever · The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. · The exhaust system may have been damaged. · The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode. 2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
81
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.
Sun Visor U.S. models
Canadian models
Safe Driving
Dashboard U.S. models only
Radiator Cap
82
Air Conditioner System
U.S. models
Canadian models
Radiator Cap
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 84 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages.................... 107
Gauges and Driver Information Interface Gauges............................................ 133 Driver Information Interface ............. 136
83
Indicators
Instrument Panel
U.S.
Parking Brake and
*1 Brake System
Canada Indicator (Red)
P. 85
U.S.
*1
Canada
*1
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator
P. 86 P. 88
Automatic Brake Hold U.S. *1 Indicator
P. 88
Canada
*1
POWER SYSTEM Indicator
READY Indicator
*1 EV Indicator
*1 EV Mode Indicator
P. 89 P. 90 P. 90 P. 90
*1 Malfunction Indicator P. 91 Lamp
12-Volt Battery *1 Charging System
Indicator
P. 92
Shift Position Indicator P. 92
Deceleration Paddle Selector Indicator
P. 92
Transmission System Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System *1 (ABS) Indicator
Supplemental Restraint *1 System Indicator
Electric Power Steering *1 (EPS) System Indicator
*1
Vehicle Stability AssistTM
(VSA®) System Indicator
*1 Vehicle Stability AssistTM
(VSA®) OFF Indicator
*1 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
High Beam Indicator
Lights On Indicator
Fog Light Indicator*
*1
Auto High-Beam Indicator
P. 93 P. 94 P. 94 P. 95 P. 95 P. 95
P. 96 P. 96 P. 97 P. 98 P. 98 P. 98 P. 98 P. 98
Immobilizer System Indicator
P. 99
Security System Alarm Indicator
P. 99
System Message Indicator P. 100
ECON Mode Indicator
P. 100
SPORT Mode Indicator
P. 100
Adaptive Cruise Control *1 (ACC) with Low Speed
P. 101
Follow Indicator (Amber)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Green)
P. 102
Lane Keeping Assist *1 System (LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green)
P. 102 P. 102
*1 Safety Support Indicator (Amber)
P. 103
Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)
P. 106
*1 : When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the power system has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the owner's manual.
84 * Not available on all models
uu Indicators u
Instrument Panel
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
U.S. Canada
(Red)
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
· Comes on when the parking brake · Comes on while driving - Make sure
is applied, and goes off when it is the parking brake is released. Check the
released.
brake fluid level.
· Comes on when the brake fluid
2 What to do when the indicator
level is low.
comes on while driving P. 646
· Comes on if there is a problem with · Comes on along with the brake system
the brake system.
indicator (amber) -Immediately stop in a
· The beeper sounds and the
safe place. Contact a dealer for repair. The
indicator comes on if you drive with brake pedal becomes harder to operate.
the parking brake not fully released. Depress the pedal further than you
· Comes on for about 30 seconds
normally do.
when you pull or push the electric · Comes on along with the ABS
parking brake switch when the
indicator - Have your vehicle checked by
power mode is in ACCESSORY or
a dealer.
VEHICLE OFF.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
· Stays on for about 30 seconds when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF while the electric parking brake is set.
Comes On or Blinks P. 646
· Blinks and the brake system indicator (amber) comes on at the same time There is a problem with the electric parking brake system. The parking brake
may not be set.
Avoid using the parking brake and have
your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time
When the Brake System Indicator
(Amber) Comes On P. 647
Message Continued 85
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
U.S. Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)
On/Blinking
Explanation
· Comes on if there is a problem with · Stays on constantly - Avoid high speeds
a system related to braking other
and sudden braking. Take the vehicle to a
than the conventional brake
dealer immediately.
system.
· Comes on while driving - Avoid using
· Comes on if there is a problem with the parking brake and have your vehicle
the cooperative control with
checked by a dealer immediately.
regenerative braking, the electric
servo brake system, or the hill start
assist system.
· Comes on if there is a problem with
the electric parking brake system.
Comes on if there is a problem with the radar sensor.
Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 451
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
(Amber)
Message
U.S. Canada
86
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
· Comes on if there is a problem with the automatic brake hold system.
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)
(Amber)
Explanation
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 544
uu Indicators u
Message
U.S.
Canada
Instrument Panel
Continued 87
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator
U.S.
Canada
Automatic Brake Hold Indicator
On/Blinking Comes on when the automatic
brake hold system is on.
Comes on when the automatic brake hold is activated.
Explanation
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 544
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 544
Message --
Instrument Panel
88
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Comes on if there is a problem with the electric vehicle system.
Comes on when the High Voltage battery temperature becomes high.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Message
POWER SYSTEM Indicator
Instrument Panel
Continued 89
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
READY Indicator
On/Blinking
Comes on when the vehicle is ready to drive.
Explanation
2 Turning on the Power P. 454
EV Indicator
EV Mode Indicator
Comes on when the vehicle is moved by the motor, and the engine is not operating.
Comes on when the vehicle is in EV mode.
--
2 SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi-Mode Drive) P. 11
Message --
Instrument Panel
90
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
· After you have set the power mode to ON, the vehicle performs system checks. However, if the readiness codes have not been set by that time, this indicator will blink five times and then go off.
· Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control system.
· Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders is detected.
· Comes on if the fuel fill cap is loose or missing.
· Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 667
· Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
· Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where there are no flammable objects. Stop the power system for 10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down. Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 645
· Comes on - Check the fuel cap before taking your vehicle to a dealer.
Message
Instrument Panel
Continued 91
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator
· Comes on when the 12-volt battery is not charging.
· Comes on while driving - Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 644
Shift Position Indicator
· Indicates the current shift position.
2 Shifting P. 463
· Comes on when the paddle selector
is pulled.
Deceleration Paddle Selector Indicator
· Blinks when deceleration does not occur while pulling the paddle selector.
· Comes on with M when SPORT
mode is selected and pulling the
paddle selector.
2 Deceleration Paddle Selector P. 470
Message -- --
92
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
· The current shift position blinks if the transmission system has a problem.
Explanation
· Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Message
Transmission System Indicator
· The current shift position or all the · Immediately park your car in a safe place.
shift positions blink if there is a
2 Emergency Towing P. 657
problem with the transmission and · Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
the vehicle is no longer able to run.
· The current shift position or all the shift positions blink if there is a problem with the transmission and it is not possible to select (P.
· While the vehicle is stopped, apply the parking brake.
· Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Continued 93
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
On/Blinking
Explanation
· Blinks and the beeper sounds for a few seconds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you set the power mode to ON, then the indicator comes on.
· If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds later.
· Blinks while driving if either you and/or the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.
· The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
· Stays on after you and/or the front passenger has fastened the seat belt(s) - A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 47
· Comes on when the fuel reserve is · Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
running low (approximately 1.59
as possible.
U.S. gal./6.0 Liter left).
· Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
· Blinks if there is a problem with the dealer.
fuel gauge.
Message
94
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
· Comes on if there is a problem with the ABS.
· Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 547
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
· Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner
· Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
· Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
· Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 648
Message
Continued 95
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System Indicator
Blinks when VSA® is active. Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA® system.
Comes on if the VSA® system is deactivated temporarily after the 12-volt battery has been disconnected, then re-connected.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 475
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Message
Comes on when you partially disable VSA®.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 476
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF Indicator
Comes on if the VSA® system is deactivated temporarily after the 12-volt battery has been disconnected, then re-connected.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
96
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
May come on briefly if the power Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
mode is set to ON and the vehicle is place, check tire pressures, and inflate the
not moved within 45 seconds, to
tire(s) if necessary.
indicate the calibration process is Stays on after the tires are inflated to
not yet complete.
the recommended pressures - The
Comes on and stays on when:
system needs to be calibrated.
- One or more tires' pressures are
2 TPMS Calibration P. 478
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been
calibrated.
Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a compact spare tire* is temporarily installed.
Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare tire, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Comes on if the TPMS is deactivated temporarily after the 12-volt battery has been disconnected, then reconnected.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Message
* Not available on all models
Continued 97
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
· Blinks when you operate the turn signal lever.
· Blink along with all turn signals when you press the hazard warning button.
· Does not blink or blinks rapidly
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 585
High Beam Indicator
· Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.
--
Lights On Indicator
Fog Light Indicator*
· Comes on when the light switch in a position other than OFF or when the switch is set to AUTO and the exterior lights come on.
· If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.
· Comes on when the fog lights are
on.
--
Auto HighBeam Indicator
· Comes on when all the operating conditions of the auto high-beam are met.
2 Auto High-Beam P. 204
Message -- -- -- -- --
98 * Not available on all models
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
Indicator
Immobilizer System Indicator
On/Blinking
· Blinks if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.
Explanation
· Blinks - You cannot start the power system. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF*1, then select the ON mode again.
· Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
· Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
Message*1
Indicator
· Blinks when the security system
Security System Alarm Indicator
alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 190
--
*1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode.
Continued 99
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
System Message Indicator
ECON Mode Indicator
On/Blinking
Explanation
· Comes on along with a beep when · While the indicator is on, press the
a problem is detected. A system
(home) button to see the message again.
message on the driver information
2 Accessing contents in the main
interface appears at the same time.
display P. 136
· Refer to the Indicators information in this
chapter when a system message appears
on the driver information interface. Take
the appropriate action for the message.
· The driver information interface does not
return to the normal screen unless the
warning is canceled, or the left selector
wheel is pressed.
· Comes on when the ECON mode is on.
2 ECON Mode P. 473
Message --
SPORT Mode Indicator
· Comes on when you press the SPORT button.
· The ambient meter remains lit up in red as long as SPORT mode is on.
2 SPORT Mode P. 469
100
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Comes on if there is a problem with Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
ACC with Low Speed Follow.
checked by a dealer.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Amber)
Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.
Comes on if the ACC with Low Speed Follow is deactivated temporarily after the 12-volt battery has been disconnected, then reconnected.
Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 451
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Message
Instrument Panel
Continued 101
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Green)
Comes on when you press the MAIN button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)
Comes on if there is a problem with Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
the LKAS.
checked by a dealer.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green)
Comes on when you press the MAIN button.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 517
Message --
--
102
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Comes on if there is a problem with Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
RDM, CMBSTM or blind spot
checked by a dealer.
information system*.
Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 451
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Safety Support Indicator (Amber)
Message
Comes on if the RDM and CMBSTM are deactivated temporarily after the 12-volt battery has been disconnected and then reconnected.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
Continued 103
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Comes on when RDM and/or CMBSTM shuts itself off.
Safety Support Indicator (Amber)
Explanation
Indicator may come on temporarily when passing through an enclosed space, such as a tunnel.
The area around the radar sensor is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris off with a soft cloth. Indicator may take some time to go off after the radar sensor is cleaned.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator does not go off even after you have cleaned the radar sensor.
2 Radar Sensor P. 538
Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
Message
104
Instrument Panel
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Safety Support Indicator (Amber)
Comes on when RDM and/or CMBSTM shuts itself off.
Models with blind spot information system
Comes on when mud, snow, or ice has accumulated in the vicinity of the blind spot information system sensor.
Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message are still displayed even after you have cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
Comes on while driving - Something may be interfering with the Blind spot information System sensor. Check the vicinity of the Blind spot information System sensor and remove any obstacles.
2 Blind spot information System* P. 483
Message
* Not available on all models
Continued 105
uu Indicators u
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)
Lights up in green when RDM, CMBSTM and blind spot information system* are on.
Lights up in green and gray when RDM, CMBSTM or blind spot information system* are off.
Lights up in gray when RDM, CMBSTM and blind spot information system* are off.
Explanation
2 RDM On and Off P. 527 2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 493 2 Blind spot information System On
and Off P. 485
Message
Instrument Panel
106 * Not available on all models
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the again with the system message indicator on. 2Switching the Display P. 136
(home) button, select Warnings to see the message
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears when the vehicle is no longer able to run Immediately stop in a safe place. due to a malfunction.
Appears when there is a risk that the vehicle will While the vehicle is stopped, apply the parking brake. move unexpectedly after you have stopped due to a Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. malfunction with the vehicle.
Appears when you set the power mode to ON again and the vehicle is able to run.
2 Turning on the Power P. 454
Continued 107
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
· Appears if any door or the trunk is not completely closed.
· Appears if any door or the trunk is opened while driving. The beeper sounds.
Explanation · Disappears when all doors and the trunk are closed.
· Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.
· Appears while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears P. 643
Appears when the engine coolant temperature is near its upper limit.
Drive slowly to prevent overheating.
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high.
2 Overheating P. 641
108
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Canadian models
Condition Appears when the washer fluid is low.
Explanation
Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 584
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.
Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and Maintenance Past Due follow.
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface P. 567
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
the 12-volt battery.
2 Checking the 12-Volt Battery P. 601
Continued 109
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Appears if there is a problem with the cooling system.
Explanation
Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.
2 Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 645
Appears if the vehicle's speed reaches about 10 mph Stop the vehicle and close the fuel fill door. (15 km/h) with the fuel fill door opened.
Appears when the fuel fill door has been open for 30 minutes.
Turn off the power system, reinstall the fuel cap, and close the fuel fill door. - If you still want to refuel, press the fuel fill door release button to reopen the door.
110
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
· Appears if the vehicle is being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving.
Explanation
2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 149
· Appears if there is a problem with the automatic lighting control system.
· Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
· Appears if there is a problem with the headlights.
· Appears while driving - The headlights may not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safety, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Continued 111
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Appears when the automatic brake hold system is turned off.
Explanation
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 544
Appears when the automatic brake hold button is Fasten the driver's seat belt.
pressed without wearing the driver's seat belt.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 544
Appears when the automatic brake hold button is pressed without depressing the brake pedal while the automatic brake hold is in operation.
Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 544
Appears when the parking brake is applied automatically while it is in operation.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 544 2 Parking Brake P. 539
112
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically Immediately depress the brake pedal. canceled while it is in operation.
Appears when the electric parking brake switch is pressed without depressing the brake pedal while the electric parking brake is in operation.
Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.
2 Parking Brake P. 539
Instrument Panel
Continued 113
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Explanation --
Appears after the driver's door is opened when the Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
power mode is in ACCESSORY.
2 POWER Button P. 196
Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the remote inside the vehicle.
Disappears when you bring the remote back inside the vehicle and close the door.
2 Remote Reminder P. 198
Appears when the remote battery becomes weak.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 603
114
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears if the remote battery is too weak to turn on the power system or the key is not within operating range to turn on the power system. A beeper sounds six times.
Bring the back of the remote into contact with the POWER button.
2 If the Remote Battery is Weak P. 636
Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the
Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a
smart entry system* or push button starting system. dealer.
Appears after you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON.
Canadian models
Appears after you unlock and open the driver's door.
2 Turning on the Power P. 454
· Appears if you press the POWER button while the · The message will disappear after six seconds or when
vehicle is moving.
the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
* Not available on all models
Continued 115
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
· Appears when the power system temperature is low. · Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be harder to start moving on an incline.
· Disappears once you start driving as the High Voltage battery warms up.
· Appears when the power system temperature is high.
· Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be harder to start moving on an incline.
· Park in a safe place, and cool the system down.
2 Overheating P. 641
· Appears if the power system is in diagnostic mode. · You may notice a decrease in available power. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
· Appears if there is a problem with the acoustic vehicle alerting system.
· Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
116
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
· Appears when you press the fuel fill door release button.
Explanation
· The display changes to Ready when the fuel vapor pressure inside the fuel tank is released. You can start refueling once Ready appears.
2 Refueling P. 557
· Appears when the vehicle is ready to be refueled.
Instrument Panel
· Appears when the high voltage battery and other · You must wait for an increase in the ambient
system control temperatures are too low to operate temperature or move the vehicle to a warmer location.
(approx. 40°F [40°C] or below).
· Consult a dealer if necessary.
· Appears when the high voltage battery temperature · You can start the power system and use the climate
is too low to operate (approx. -22°F [-30°C] or
control system to warm up the interior, which will also
below).
warm the High Voltage battery enough for you to drive
the vehicle.
Continued 117
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
· Appears when the high voltage battery charge is running extremely low.
Explanation · Contact a dealer immediately.
Instrument Panel
118
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
· Appears when you failed to select EV mode or EV mode is automatically canceled.
· The cause may be shown with the following message: - Battery Temperature At Limit. - Battery Charge Too Low. - Engine Too Cold. - Cabin Being Heated. - Speed Too High. - Hard Acceleration Requested.
· Appears when EV mode has been automatically canceled.
Explanation · EV mode is available once the condition is improved or
the cause that canceled EV mode is cleared.
2 EV Button P. 14
· Appears if the engine needs to be started when you press the EV button.
--
Continued 119
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
· Appears when you try to change the shift position · Release your foot off the accelerator pedal, then select without releasing your foot off the accelerator pedal. a shift button.
· Appears when the (P button is pressed while the vehicle is moving.
· Appears if you put the transmission into (R while the vehicle is moving forward, or into (D while the vehicle is reversing.
· Make sure that the vehicle comes to a stop before operating the select button.
· Appears when you set the power mode to ON without fastening the driver's seat belt.
· Appears when you change the shift position after (P has been automatically selected with the driver's door open, the driver's seat belt unfastened, then the brake pedal is released.
· Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive.
2 Shift Operation P. 465
· Appears when you try to change the shift position · Depress the brake pedal, then select a shift button. without depressing the brake pedal.
120
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
· Appears when you set the power mode to OFF while · Immediately stop in a safe place, set the parking brake,
driving.
then restart the power system. If the message
disappears, continue driving.
· Appears if the vehicle is stopped and the driver's seat belt is unfastened, as there is a possibility that the vehicle may roll.
· When the power system is ON or when you are parking or exiting the vehicle, put the transmission into (P before releasing the brake pedal.
2 Shift Operation P. 465
· Appears if you depress the accelerator pedal when · Release the accelerator pedal. After that, depress the
the transmission is in (N.
brake pedal and change the transmission position.
Appears if the shift position is repeatedly changed Wait awhile, then change the shift position. between (P and another position.
Appears if the 12V battery is not charged enough to Keep the power system on and wait awhile.
make it possible to change shift positions.
The battery may be nearing the end of its life.
Have it checked by a dealer.
Continued 121
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
· Appears for a few seconds if you have not pressed the (N button long enough to initiate Neutral-Hold mode.
Explanation
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 467
· Appears when you press and hold (N button for more than two seconds.
· Disappears when you set the shift position to a gear other than (N. 2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N
position [car wash mode] P. 467
Instrument Panel
122
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
· Appears if there is a problem with the auto highbeam.
Explanation
· Manually operate the headlight switch. · If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when
this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.
Appears when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.
You can resume the set speed after the condition that caused ACC with Low Speed Follow to cancel improves. Press the RES/+ button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with a vehicle in front of you.
Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 490
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Continued 123
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Appears when ACC with Low Speed Follow is canceled due to excessive high vehicle speed.
Explanation
Reduce the speed, then reset ACC with Low Speed Follow.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high for you to set ACC with Low Speed Follow.
Reduce the speed, then set ACC with Low Speed Follow.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Appears if ACC with Low Speed Follow is canceled Immediately depress the brake pedal. while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/- button while the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is depressed.
ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
124
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears when the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.
ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/- button ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
while the distance between your vehicle and the
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
vehicle ahead of you is too close.
Follow P. 499
Appears when the parking brake is applied automatically while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.
ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
2 Parking Brake P. 539
Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/- button while the parking brake is applied.
ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
2 Parking Brake P. 539
Continued 125
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Appears if the VSA® or traction control function operates while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.
Explanation
ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Appears just before the ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled when you are descending a long hill etc (The following interval is automatically set to extra long).
Appears when the ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Appears when you are descending a long hill etc and you press the RES/+ or SET/- button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
126
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears when the driver's seat belt is unfastened while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/- button ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
while the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 499
Appears when the transmission is put into any position other than (D while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.
ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/- button ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
while the transmission is in any position other than
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
(D .
Follow P. 499
Continued 127
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.
ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/- button ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
while the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 499
128
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front.
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. The message may take some time to go off.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover.
2 Radar Sensor P. 538
Appears if the temperature inside the front sensor camera is too high and the ACC with Low Speed Follow, LKAS, traffic sign recognition system and auto high-beam cannot be activated.
Use the climate control system to cool down the camera.
Disappears - The camera has been cooled down and the systems are activated normally.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
Appears if the area around the front sensor camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc and be prevented from detecting a vehicle in front.
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
Continued 129
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 517
lane. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected lane.
When you selected Warning Only
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 525
You can change the setting for the road departure mitigation system. Narrow, Normal, Wide, and Warning Only can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 158, 372
When you selected Narrow, Normal or Wide
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. The system also steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane.
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
When you selected Narrow
Appears when the vehicle is likely to drive out of a detected lane.
--
The RDM system also steers the vehicle to help you
remain within your driving lane.
130
Instrument Panel
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS. sounds simultaneously.
Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS button is pressed, but there is a problem with a system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously.
If any other system indicators come on, such as the VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
2 Indicators P. 84
Appears if the ECON mode or SPORT mode cannot be changed due to certain situations, such as a system error or adverse driving conditions.
2 ECON Mode P. 473 2 SPORT Mode P. 469
Continued 131
uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Models with remote engine starter
Message
Condition
Appears when you unlock and open the driver's door while the power system is on by remote engine start.
Explanation
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback* P. 456
Instrument Panel
132 * Not available on all models
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Driver Information Interface
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, POWER/CHARGE gauge, High Voltage battery charge level gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.
Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
1Speedometer
You can show another speed unit on the driver information interface (sub display) and set the displayed measurements to read in either mph and km/h.
2 POWER/CHARGE Gauge P. 135
Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.
Continued
133
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
Shows the remaining high voltage battery charge level.
1High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
The high voltage battery charge level may decrease under the following conditions:
· When the 12-volt battery has been replaced. · When the 12-volt battery has been disconnected. · When the high voltage battery control system
corrects its reading.
The charge level reading will be corrected automatically while driving.
Changes in the temperature of the high voltage battery can increase or decrease the battery's charging capacity. If temperature changes cause the battery's capacity to change, the number of indicators in the battery charge level gauge may also change, even if the amount of charge remains the same.
Instrument Panel
134
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
Instrument Panel
POWER/CHARGE Gauge
Electric motor The power level supplied to the electric motor is displayed by the readings on the POWER side.
Battery charge in progress The power level supplied to the high voltage battery is displayed by readings on the CHARGE side.
Speed Unit Enables you to show another speed unit on the driver information interface and set the displayed measurements to read in either mph and km/h.
Select the Gauge Only screen.
2 Accessing contents in the main display P. 136
Press and hold the left selector wheel when you select the Gauge Only on the driver information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will change from mph to km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear for a few seconds.
135
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Driver Information Interface
The driver information interface shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
Switching the Display
Accessing contents in the main display Press the (home) button, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to the content you want to see. Press the left selector wheel to see detailed information.
1Switching the Display
If a warning initially appears, you can - after reading it - press the (home) button to proceed immediately to the content or to any other warning(s).
To go back to the previous screen, press the *1 (back) button.
To go back to the home screen, press the button.
(home)
Models with Display Audio
You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents using the audio/information screen.
2 Customizing the Meter P. 283
*1: Models with Display Audio
136
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Left Selector Wheel
(back) Button* (home) Button
Roll the left selector wheel.
* Not available on all models
P. 135 P. 155 P. 157 P. 140 P. 154 P. 142 P. 147 P. 146
P. 145
*
P. 158
P. 153
P. 145
P. 149
P. 152
P. 148
*
P. 144
Continued 137
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Sub display Press the TRIP button to change the display.
TRIP
TRIP
TRIP
Instrument Panel
TRIP Button
Odometer Outside temperature
Trip A
Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
138
Trip B
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the TRIP Button.
Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the TRIP Button. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect. Use the customized features in the driver information interface or audio/information screen to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
1Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
* Not available on all models
Continued
139
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Range & Fuel
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.
Trip Computer A
Range
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy Trip Meter
Instrument Panel
140
Left Selector Wheel
Roll the left selector wheel.
Trip Computer B
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Trip meter Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
1Trip meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by rolling the left selector wheel.
Resetting a trip meter To reset the trip meter, display it, press the left selector wheel and then select Reset.
u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
Resetting the trip meter in the Range & Fuel, the trip meter in the sub display resets at the same time.
Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel) Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.
1Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel)
You can change when the average fuel economy is reset.
2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
Instant fuel economy Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicle's current fuel economy.
* Not available on all models
Continued
141
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Speed & Time
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.
Trip Computer A
Average Speed Elapsed Time Trip Meter
Instrument Panel
142
Left Selector Wheel
Roll the left selector wheel.
Trip Computer B
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Trip meter
2 Trip meter P. 141
Elapsed Time Shows the time elapsed since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Average Speed (Avg. Speed) Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.
1Elapsed Time You can change when to reset the elapsed time. 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
1Average Speed (Avg. Speed) You can change when to reset the average speed. 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
Instrument Panel
* Not available on all models
Continued
143
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Navigation*
Compass Turn-By-Turn Driving Directions
Compass Shows the compass screen.
Turn-by-Turn Directions When driving guidance is provided by the navigation system*, Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, turn-by-turn directions to your destination appear.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual 2 Android Auto P. 334 2 Apple CarPlay P. 331
1 Navigation *
You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn display come on or not during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 372
Models with navigation system
When the compass or turn-by-turn directions are displayed, you can control some navigation system functions on the driver information interface by scrolling the left selector wheel.
2 Refer to the navigation system
144 * Not available on all models
Instrument Panel
Warnings
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 107
1Warnings
If there are no Warnings, None message appears on the driver information interface.
(Example)
Maintenance
Oil Life Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 565
Continued
145
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Phone
Shows the current phone information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 420
Instrument Panel
146
Audio
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Shows the current audio information.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 268
Instrument Panel
Continued
147
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Traffic Sign Recognition System
Shows the traffic sign recognition system.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 530
148
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the degree of the driver's attention on the driver information interface.
1Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if the driver is tired or inattentive. Regardless of the system's feedback, if you are feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed.
Driver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Left Selector Wheel
(home) Button
When you select Driver Attention on the driver information interface, bars on it light up in white to indicate the degree of the driver's attention.
2 Accessing contents in the main display P. 136
Level
Continued
149
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
If two bars light up, the Driver Attention Level Low message will appear.
If one bar lights up, the Driver Attention Level Low. Time For A Break message will appear, a beep will sound, and the steering wheel will vibrate. If this message appears, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed. The message will disappear when the left selector wheel is pressed or when the system has determined that the driver is driving normally. If the driver does not take a break and the monitor continues to detect that the driver is very tired, the message will appear again after approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a beep and steering wheel vibrations. The message does not appear when the traveling time is 30 minutes or less.
150
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
The Driver Attention Monitor resets when: · The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF. · The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.
For the Driver Attention Monitor to function: · The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h). · The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.
Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:
· The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 517
· The condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy. · It is windy. · The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as
changing lanes or accelerating.
1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
The bars on the driver information interface remain grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is functioning.
Customizing You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile and Audible Alert*1/Tactile And Audible Alert*2, Tactile Alert, or Off*1/OFF*2.
2 Customized Features P. 158, 372
*1 : Models with color audio *2 : Models with Display Audio
Continued
151
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Driving Support Information
Icon of vehicle ahead Distance of vehicle ahead
Shows the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead. Informs you whether ACC with Low Speed Follow and/or LKAS is activated or not. If ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated, the set following interval is displayed. If LKAS is activated, the displayed lane marks change to indicate that LKAS is activated.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 499
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 517
When ACC and LKAS is in On
Set Vehicle Interval
1Driving Support Information In case ACC with Low Speed Follow is not activated, when the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead becomes to small, the section behind the vehicle icon turns amber and alerts you.
Amber gradation
Instrument Panel
ACC on: The section behind the vehicle icon turns green. LKAS on: The lane outlines appear on the display. LKAS starts: The lane lines change to solid ones. LKAS suspend: The lane lines change to dotted ones.
152
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Safety Support
Indicates the state of RDM, CMBSTM and blind spot information system*, such as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.
The following colors indicate the state of any of the above mentioned systems: · Green: The system is on. · Gray: The system is off. · Amber: There is a problem with the system.
Area Info for CMBSTM
CMBSTM Icon and State Info
RDM Icon and State Info
1Safety Support
If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
To turn on or off each system, first rotate the left selector wheel to switch displays. From the next display you can select which system to turn on or off.
2 RDM On and Off P. 527 2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 493 2 Blind spot information System On and Off
P. 485
You can also confirm the state of the each function by the color of the safety support indicator.
2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 103 2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)
P. 106
Area Info for RDM
Area Info for Blind spot information system*
Blind spot information system Icon and State Info*
* Not available on all models
Continued
153
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Average Fuel Economy Records
Shows the average fuel economy for the last three driving cycles (1-3), and the current driving cycle (0) in mpg or l/100 km. Each time you set the power mode to ON, the display is updated, and the oldest record is deleted.
154
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Eco Drive Display/Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
Eco Drive Display The vehicle icon on the display moves forward or backward while driving. The more aggressive the acceleration is, the further the icon moves forward. The more aggressive the deceleration is, the further the icon moves backward. Keep the icon near the center of the circle for better fuel economy while driving.
Aggressive
Moderate
Fuel-Efficient Moderate
Deceleration Deceleration Driving
Acceleration
Aggressive Acceleration
1Eco Drive Display
Switch between the average fuel economy A and average fuel economy B by rolling the left selector wheel.
Vehicle Icon
Average Fuel Economy
Instrument Panel
Continued
155
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points Appear for a few seconds when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Each has three stages. Depending on your driving style, the leaf icon(s) and the gauge increase or decrease to indicate that you have reached a different stage of fuel economy.
Drive Cycle Score
Advancing to 2nd Stage
Advancing to 3rd Stage
Lifetime Points
Receding to 2nd Stage
Receding to 3rd Stage
Resetting the Drive Cycle Score 1. Make sure the shift position is in (P. Turn the power mode to ON. 2. If ECON mode is on, press the ECON button to turn it off. 3. Turn the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. 4. Turn the power mode to ON again.
u Make sure to complete steps from 4 through 6 within 30 seconds. 5. Depress the brake pedal twice.
u The color of the ambient meter will change from white to green. u When the Fuel Efficiency Backlight setting on the driver information
interface or audio/information screen is off, the color stays white. 6. Press the ECON button twice.
u The color of the ambient meter will turn to monochrome. 7. Turn the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
156
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Power Flow Monitor
Displays the power flow of the motor and engine, indicating the vehicle's power source and whether the battery is being charged.
Power Flow Engine
Engine ON Engine OFF
1Power Flow Monitor
While the vehicle is stationary with the engine running, the following may appear on the driver information interface.
Instrument Panel
Hybrid (HV)
Power is supplied by the motor and the engine.
Electric Vehicle (EV)
Power is supplied by the motor.
Engine (Direct Drive)
Power is being supplied to charge the High Voltage battery and supply power to the wheels.
Regeneration
The motor is charging the High Voltage battery.
Power is being supplied by only the engine.
The engine is running and the motor is charging the High Voltage battery.
Continued
157
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Customized Features*
Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.
How to customize Select the Vehicle Settings screen by rolling the left selector wheel while the power mode is in ON, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Push the left selector wheel.
Driver Information Interface: Goes to Vehicle Settings.
1Customized Features* To customize other features, roll the left selector wheel. 2 List of customizable options P. 161 2 Example of customization settings P. 166
Put the transmission into (P before you attempt to change any customized setting.
Instrument Panel
Left selector wheel Roll: Changes the customize menus and items. Push: Enter the selected item.
158 * Not available on all models
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Customization flow Roll the left selector wheel to select Vehicle Settings and push the left selector wheel.
Vehicle Settings
Push
Instrument Panel
TPMS Calibration
Roll
Driver Assist System Setup Push
Roll Roll
Forward Collision Warning Distance ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Road Departure Mitigation Setting Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Traffic Sign Recognition System Driver Attention Monitor
Meter Setup
Push
Language Selection
Push
Roll
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
"Trip A" Reset Timing
"Trip B" Reset Timing
Roll
Roll
Adjust Alarm Volume
Reverse Alert Tone
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Speed/Distance Units
Lighting Setup
Roll
Push Roll
Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto OFF Timer Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON
Continued 159
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Roll
Door Setup
Push
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Push
Roll Roll
Roll
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Reset
Roll
Default All
Roll
Exit
Instrument Panel
160
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
List of customizable options
Setup Group Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
TPMS Calibration
--
Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).
Calibrate/Cancel
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Changes Collision Mitigation Braking System (CMBSTM) alert distance.
Long/Normal*1/Short
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.
ON/OFF*1
Driver Assist System Setup
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.
Causes the system to beep when the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is suspended.
Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only
ON/OFF*1
Traffic Sign Recognition Select On/Off to indicate small displaying traffic sign Small Icons ON*1/Small Icons
System
icon on the driver information interface.
OFF
Driver Attention Monitor
Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.
Tactile Alert/Tactile And Audible Alert*1/OFF
*1:Default Setting
Continued 161
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group Customizable Features
Description
Language Selection
Changes the displayed language.
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
"Trip A" Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A.
Meter Setup "Trip B" Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed time B.
Adjust Alarm Volume
Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers, warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.
Reverse Alert Tone
Turns the reverse alert tone on and off.
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.
Speed/Distance Units
Selects the trip computer units.
*1:Default Setting
Selectable Settings English*1/Français/Español -5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
When Refueled/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1
When Refueled/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1
High/Mid*1/Low ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF km/hkm/mphmiles*1
162
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group
Lighting Setup
Customizable Features
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto OFF Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON
*1: Default Setting
Description
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver's door.
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the instrument panel when the headlight switch is in AUTO.
Used to automatically come on the headlights when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch is in AUTO.
Selectable Settings 60sec/30sec*1/15sec 60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min
ON*1/OFF
Continued 163
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock.
With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift From P/OFF
Door Setup
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock.
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock on the first operation of the remote or built-in key.
All Doors When Driver's Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shifted To Park/All Doors When Ignition Switched OFF/OFF
Driver Door*1/All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
ON*1/OFF
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening any door.
90sec/60sec/30sec*1
*1: Default Setting
164
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group
Maintenance Reset
Customizable Features --
Default All
--
*1: Default Setting
Description
Resets the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service.
Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as default.
Selectable Settings Cancel/All Due Items/Item # Only (#: A, B, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7)
Cancel/Set
Instrument Panel
Continued 165
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Example of customization settings The steps for changing the "Trip A" Reset Timing setting to When Refueled are shown below. The default setting for "Trip A" Reset Timing is Manually Reset.
1. Roll the multi-function steering-wheel controls to select Vehicle Settings, then push the left selector wheel.
2. Roll the multi-function steering-wheel controls until Meter Setup appears on the display.
3. Push the left selector wheel. u Language Selection appears first on the display.
166
Instrument Panel
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
4. Roll the left selector wheel until "Trip A" Reset Timing appears on the display, then push the left selector wheel. u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select When Refueled, IGN Off, Manually Reset, or Exit.
5. Roll the left selector wheel and select When Refueled, then push the left selector wheel. u The When Refueled Setup screen appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen.
6. Roll the left selector wheel until Exit appears on the display, then push the left selector wheel.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen.
167
168
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 170 Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 172 Low Remote Signal Strength ............ 174 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside .......................................... 175 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................. 182 Childproof Door Locks ..................... 184 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 185 Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 186 Security System Immobilizer System .......................... 189
* Not available on all models
Security System Alarm...................... 190 Opening and Closing the Windows ...192 Moonroof*................................................ 195 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
POWER Button................................. 196 Turn Signals ..................................... 199 Light Switches.................................. 200 Fog Lights* ...................................... 203 Daytime Running Lights ................... 203 Auto High-Beam .............................. 204 Wipers and Washers ........................ 207
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button ........................................209 Brightness Control ........................... 210 Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 211 Adjusting the Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 212 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 213 Adjusting the Seats .......................... 214 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items ................................................ 222 Climate Control System Using Automatic Climate Control .... 232 Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 238
169
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen with the power mode in ON.
Adjusting the Time
Models with color audio
Using the MENU/CLOCK button 1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button.
u Adjust Clock is selected. 2. Rotate to change hour, then press . 3. Rotate to change minute, then press
. 4. To enter the selection, rotate and select
Set, then press .
1Clock
Models with Display Audio
The clock is automatically updated through the audio system.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features* P. 365, 372
1Using the MENU/CLOCK button These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
Controls
170 * Not available on all models
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock
Models with Display Audio
Using the Settings menu on the audio/ information screen
1. Press the , then select Settings. 2. Select System. 3. Select Day & Time. 4. Select Set Date & Time. 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.
To adjust time: 6. Select Set Time. 7. Selecting 3 / 4 . 8. Select Save to set the time.
To adjust date: 6. Select Set Date. 7. Selecting 3 / 4 . 8. Select Save to set the date.
1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock displayed on the upper right corner of the display or the Clock icon on the home screen. 1. Touch the clock on the display.
The clock screen of the select face-type appears. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Day & Time. 4. Select Set Date & Time. 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF. 6. Select Set Date or Set Time. 7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting 3 / 4 . 8. Select Save to set the time.
You can customize the date display to MM/DD/ YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY or YYYY/MM/DD.
2 Customized Features P. 372
Controls
171
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Models without smart entry system
Use the keys to turn on and off the power system, and to lock and unlock all the doors
and to open the trunk.
You can also use the remote transmitter to
lock and unlock all the doors and to open the
trunk.
Models with smart entry system and remote engine starter
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 189
Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys:
· Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
· Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. · Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand. · Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the power system may not activate, and the remote transmitter may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.
Models with remote engine starter
You can remotely turn the power system on using the remote engine start.
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback* P. 456
Controls
172 * Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
Built-in Key
Release Knob
Built-in Key
Key Number Tag
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, slide the release knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the remote until it clicks.
Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.
1Key Number Tag Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot activate the power system, contact a dealer.
Controls
173
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Remote Signal Strength
Low Remote Signal Strength
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the remote when locking/unlocking the doors*, opening the trunk*, or to activate the power system.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors*, opening the trunk*, or activating the power system may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: · Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. · You are carrying the remote together with telecommunications equipment,
laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. · A metallic object is touching or covering the remote.
1Low Remote Signal Strength
Communication between the remote and the vehicle consumes the remote's battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.
Controls
174 * Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
When you carry the remote, you can lock/ unlock the doors and open the trunk. You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle. You can open the trunk within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk release button.
Locking the doors
Touch the door lock sensor on the front door. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all the doors lock; and the security system sets.
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior light comes on when you unlock the doors. No doors opened: The light fades out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked: The light goes off immediately. 2 Interior Lights P. 222
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System* If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry system, the doors will automatically relock.
You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
Door Lock Sensor
Controls
* Not available on all models
Continued
175
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Unlocking the doors and trunk Grab the driver's door handle: u The driver's door unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice. Grab the front passenger's door handle: u All doors unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice.
Trunk Release Button
Press the trunk release button: u The trunk unlocks and opens. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button* P. 187
Controls
176 * Not available on all models
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
· Do not leave the remote in the vehicle when you
get out. Carry it with you.
· Even if you are not carrying the remote, you can
lock/unlock the doors while someone else with the remote is within range.
· The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the remote is within range.
· If you grip a front door handle or touch a door lock
sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by locking or unlocking the doors.
· After locking the door, you have up to two seconds
during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least two seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.
· The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
· Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
· The remote may not operate if it is too close to the
door and door glass.
The light flash, beep and door unlock mode settings can be customized using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 372
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m)
Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock®)
When you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the remote, the doors will automatically lock. The auto lock function activates when all doors are closed, and the remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle. Exit vehicle while carrying remote and close door(s). 1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of
the vehicle. u The beeper sounds; the auto lock
function will be activated. 2. Carry the remote beyond about 5 feet
(1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors will then lock.
1Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock®) The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the audio/information screen. If you set the auto lock function to ON using the audio/information screen, only the remote that was used to unlock the driver's door prior to the setting change can activate auto lock. 2 Customized Features P. 372
After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the remote will continue to flash until the doors are locked.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.
When you open a door after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be delayed until all doors are closed.
Under the following circumstances, the auto lock function will not activate:
· The remote is inside the vehicle.
uThe beeper will not sound.
· The remote is taken out of its operational range
before all the doors are closed. uThe beeper will sound.
Continued
177
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
To temporarily deactivate the function: 1. Set the power mode to OFF. 2. Open the driver's door. 3. Using the master door lock switch, operate
the lock as follows: Lock Unlock Lock Unlock. u The beeper sounds and the function is
deactivated.
To restore the function: · Set the power mode to ON. · Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock
function. · With the remote on you, move out of the
auto lock function operation range. · Open any door.
1Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock®)
The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met.
· The remote is inside the vehicle. · A door or the hood is not closed. · The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF.
· The remote is not located within a radius of about
5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases.
· The remote is put inside the vehicle through a
window.
· You are located too close to the vehicle. · The remote is put inside the trunk.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.
Controls
178
Controls
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Using the Remote Transmitter
LED
Lock Button
Locking the doors Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
Unlock Button
Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button. Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door unlocks.
Twice: u The remaining doors unlock.
1Using the Remote Transmitter If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock. You can change the relock timer setting. 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 603
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
* Not available on all models
Continued
179
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If the lock or unlock button of the remote does not work, use the key instead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 603
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Lock
Unlock
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key When you lock the driver's door with a key, all the other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
Controls
180 * Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using the key, you can lock the door without it.
Locking the front doors Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors lock at the same time.
Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle.
Locking the rear doors Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
Lockout prevention system The doors cannot be locked when the remote is inside the vehicle.
Controls
181
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Using the Lock Tab
To Lock
Lock Tab
Locking a door Push the lock tab forward.
To Unlock
Unlocking a door Pull the lock tab rearward.
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, all of the other doors lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
Controls
182
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
Pull the front door inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one motion.
Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However, this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 184
Controls
Unlocking and opening the driver's door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver's door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door.
Models with color audio
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF using the driver information interface.
2 Customized Features* P. 158
Models with Display Audio
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 372
* Not available on all models
Continued
183
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all the doors.
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either front door using the master door lock switch, all the other doors lock/ unlock at the same time.
Controls
To Lock To Unlock
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door.
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.
Unlock
When opening the door Open the door using the outside door handle.
Lock
184
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.
Auto Door Locking
Drive lock mode All doors lock when the vehicle's speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Models with color audio
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the driver information interface.
2 Customized Features* P. 158
Auto Door Unlocking
Driver's door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver's door is opened.
Models with Display Audio
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the audio/ information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 372
Controls
* Not available on all models
185
Controls
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
Opening the trunk Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight. Closing the trunk Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 81
Using the Trunk Opener
Pressing and holding the trunk opener on the driver's door unlocks and opens the trunk.
2 When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 659
Trunk Opener
186
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button*
Using the Trunk Release Button*
Trunk Release Button
Push up the release button on the trunk lid after the doors are unlocked.
2 When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 659
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the trunk if you carry the remote.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds.
1Using the Trunk Release Button*
· If you forget the remote inside, the beeper will
sound and the trunk will not close.
· A person who is not carrying the remote can
unlock the trunk if a person who is carrying it is within range.
· If the beeper sounds after you close the trunk,
move the remote away from the trunk and close again.
· The remote may not operate if it is too close to the
trunk.
Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for approximately one second to unlock and open the trunk.
Trunk Release Button
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the driver's door is locked, the trunk will automatically lock when you close it. Otherwise, you will have to lock it manually.
Controls
* Not available on all models
187
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener
Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow.
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.
Lever
Controls
188
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the power system. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when pressing the POWER button: · Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the POWER button. · Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. · Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the POWER
button. · Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as televisions
and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.
Canadian models
Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the vehicle on the first time after the 12-volt battery has been disconnected.
Controls
189
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the trunk or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system*. However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON.
When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently and some exterior lights flash.
To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system*, or set the power mode to ON. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: · The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). · The hood is closed. · All doors and the trunk are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter
or smart entry system*.
When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds.
To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter or smart entry system*, or when the power mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
1Security System Alarm Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.
The security system alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.
Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when:
· Unlocking the door with the lock tab. · Opening the trunk with the trunk opener or the
emergency trunk opener.
· Opening the hood with the hood release.
If the 12-volt battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system*.
190 * Not available on all models
Panic Mode
Panic Button
The panic button on the remote transmitter
If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: · The horn sounds. · Some exterior lights flash.
Canceling panic mode · Press any button on the remote transmitter. · Set the power mode to ON.
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
191
Controls
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, using the switches on the doors.
The driver's side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver's seat.
When the power window lock button is pressed, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle.
Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
Power Window Lock Button
Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
Indicator
until the desired position is reached.
Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
Front Passenger's Window Switch
Driver's Window Switch
The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction.
The driver's window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
192
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up.
Open
Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows While driving with any of the windows open, you may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized.
If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the windows open, lower all of the other windows slightly or open the moonroof*.
Opening the Windows with the Remote
To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.
1Opening the Windows with the Remote
If you open the windows with the remote, the moonroof* will open automatically along with them.
If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.
Unlock Button
Controls
* Not available on all models
Continued
193
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key
Close
Open
To open: Unlock the driver's door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there. To close: Lock the driver's door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there.
1Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key
If you open/close the windows with the key, the moonroof* will open/close automatically along with them.
Release the key to stop the windows at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation.
Controls
194 * Not available on all models
Moonroof*
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
Using the Moonroof Switch
Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
Open
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
Tilt Close
The moonroof automatically opens or closes all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, pull or push the switch briefly.
Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
1 Moonroof *
3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Opening either front door cancels this function.
Controls
Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.
You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof.
2 Opening the Windows with the Remote P. 193
2 Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key P. 194
* Not available on all models
195
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
POWER Button
Changing the Power Mode
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) The button is off. The power to all electrical components is turned off.
1POWER Button POWER Button Operating Range You can start the power system when the remote is inside the vehicle.
Operating Range
Controls
196
ACCESSORY The button blinks (in red). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.
ON The button blinks (in red). All electrical components can be used. Without pressing the brake pedal
Press the button.
If the battery of the remote is getting low, the power system may not start when you press the POWER button. If the power system does not start, refer to the following link.
2 If the Remote Battery is Weak P. 636
The power system may also start if the remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.
ON mode: The POWER button is on (in red), if the power system is on.
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button
Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the 12-volt battery.
Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver's door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning beep sounds.
Controls
Continued
197
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button
Remote Reminder
Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/ or outside the vehicle to remind you that the remote is out of the vehicle. If the buzzer continues even after the remote is put back inside, place it to be within its operational range.
When the power mode is in ON If the remote is taken out of the vehicle, and all doors are closed, a warning buzzer sounds from both inside and outside the vehicle. A warning message on the driver information interface notifies the driver inside that the remote is outside of the vehicle.
When the power mode is in ACCESSORY
If the remote is taken out of the vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a warning buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle.
1Remote Reminder When the remote is within the system's operational range, and the driver's door is closed, the warning function cancels.
If the remote is taken out of the vehicle after the power system has been turned on, you can no longer change the POWER button mode or restart the power system. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the POWER button.
Removing the remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.
Do not put the remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the system's operational range.
Controls
198
Turn Signals
(A) (B) (B) (A)
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the power mode is in ON.
(A): Turn signal Push the lever up or down based on the direction you want to turn, and the turn signal will blink.
1(A): Turn signal
The turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will blink when the external turn signal blinks.
2 Indicators P. 84
(B): One-touch turn signal When you lightly push the lever up or down and release it, the turn signal will blink 3 times.
Controls
199
Controls
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Light Switches
Manual Operation
U.S. models
High Beams
Flashing the high beams Low Beams
Canadian models
High Beams
Flashing the high beams Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting. High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
Canadian models
Lights off Turn the lever to OFF either when: · The transmission is in (P. · The parking brake is applied. To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when: · The transmission is taken out of (P and the
parking brake is released. · The vehicle starts to move.
1Light Switches If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 98
Do not leave the lights on when the power system is off because it will cause the 12-volt battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
200
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
Automatic lighting control can be used when the power mode is in ON.
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
When the light switch is in AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness.
The headlights come on when you unlock a door in dark areas with the headlight switch in AUTO.
u Once you lock the door, the headlights will go off.
The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
Controls
Continued
201
Controls
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Headlight Integration with Wipers
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the driver's door.
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver's door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
U.S. models
You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at
Max High
Bright
Mid
Low Min
Dark
2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
1Headlight Integration with Wipers
This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.
1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting. 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
202 * Not available on all models
Controls
Fog Lights*
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
Daytime Running Lights
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met: · The power mode is in ON. · The headlight switch is AUTO or OFF. · The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) will turn off the daytime running lights.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the headlight switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.
* Not available on all models
203
Controls
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Auto High-Beam
The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation.
Front Sensor Camera
1Auto High-Beam The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary.
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.
How to Use the Auto High-Beam
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.
Light Switch · The power mode is in ON. · The light switch is in AUTO. · The lever is in the low beam position. · The headlights have been automatically activated. · It is dark outside the vehicle.
Auto High-Beam Indicator
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on. · Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.
Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
For the auto high-beam to work properly:
· Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
· Keep the windshield around the camera clean. · When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
· Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area
around the camera.
· Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
204
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Controls
Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam When auto-high beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions.
Switching to high beam:
Switching to low beam:
All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 25 mph (40
km/h) or more. There are no preceding or
oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on. There are few street lights on the road ahead.
One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 15 mph (24
km/h) or less. There is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on. There are many street lights on the road ahead.
Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto highbeam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.
Using the lever: Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving.
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on.
Using the light switch: Turn the light switch to .
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.
1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.
· The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
· Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.).
· Surrounding light sources, such as street lights,
electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating the road ahead.
· The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
· The road is bumpy or has many curves. · A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a
vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or oncoming direction.
· Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear. · A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object
ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.
· The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under
roadside trees or behind median barriers.
· The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,
bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when:
· Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed. · The camera has been detected a dense fog.
Continued
205
Controls
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or
on, set the power mode to ON, then carry out the following procedures while the
vehicle is stationary.
AUTO Position
To turn the system off: With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever
toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds.
After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks
twice, release the lever.
To turn the system on: With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks once, release the lever.
1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears:
· Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.
· Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears:
· Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system does not operate until you turn the system on.
Park in a safe place before turning the system off or on.
206
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers/Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the power mode is in ON.
Pull to use washer.
Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring*
MIST OFF INT*1/AUTO*2 LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe
MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.
Wiper switch (OFF, INT*1/AUTO*2, LO, HI) Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings.
Adjusting wiper operation* Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper operation.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.
NOTICE Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation's shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.
NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
*1: Models with manual intermittent operation *2: Models with automatic intermittent operation
* Not available on all models
Continued
207
Controls
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode.
Adjustment Ring
The wipers operate intermittently, at low speed, or at high speed and stops in accordance with the amount of rainfall the rainfall sensor detects.
AUTO sensitivity adjustment When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor (using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will operate in accordance with your preference.
1Wipers and Washers If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then remove the obstacle.
1Automatic Intermittent Wipers* The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
Rainfall Sensor
Sensor sensitivity
Low Sensitivity High Sensitivity
NOTICE
AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system:
· Cleaning the windshield · Driving through a car wash · No rain present
208 * Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
Models without SYNC button
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, it does not automatically switch off.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long time while the power system is stopped. This may weaken the 12-volt battery, making it difficult to turn the power system on.
When the power mode is set to ON and the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.
Models with SYNC button
Controls
209
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Brightness Control
Control Dial
When the power mode is in ON, you can use the brightness control dial to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the dial up. Dim: Turn the dial down.
You will hear a beep when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after adjusting the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen.
Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the driver information interface while you are adjusting it.
1Brightness Control The brightness of the instrument panel will be reduced when the following conditions:
· The power mode is in ON. · The light switch is in any position other than OFF
and it is dark outside.
To cancel the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on, turn the dial up until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds.
The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
Controls
210
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
To adjust
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
Lever
To lock
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.
Controls
211
Controls
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
Tab
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
Up from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
1Adjusting the Mirrors Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 214
Daytime Position
Night Down Position
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
Sensor
When you are driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you, based on inputs from the mirror sensor. Press the auto button to turn this function on and off. When activated, the auto indicator comes on.
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
The auto dimming function cancels when the transmission is in (R.
Auto Button
212 * Not available on all models
Power Door Mirrors
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
You can adjust the door mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
213
Adjusting the Seats
Front Seats
Allow sufficient space.
Move back.
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger's seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible.
1Adjusting the Seats
3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjusting the front power seat(s)*
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.
Horizontal Position Adjustment
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Controls
Height Adjustment (Driver's seat only)
Driver's seat is shown
214 * Not available on all models
Seat-back Angle Adjustment
Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*
Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)* Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.
Driver's seat is shown.
Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.
Controls
* Not available on all models
Continued
215
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.
Controls
216
Controls
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Rear Seats
Folding Down the Rear Seat(s*)
Guide
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the guide.
1Folding Down the Rear Seat(s*) The rear seat-back(s*) can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 81
Center Shoulder Belt
Release Lever(s*)
2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release the lock.
To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks. When returning the seat-back to its original position, push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 65
3. Fold the seat-back down.
Make sure all items in the trunk or items extending through the opening into the rear seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold down.
* Not available on all models
217
uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the power system is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.
Controls
218
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions
Position head in the center of the head restraint.
Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant's head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant's ears should be level with the center height of the restraint.
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.
1Head Restraints
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.
In order for the head restraint system to work properly:
· Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
· Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
· Install each restraint in its proper location.
Controls
Continued
219
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.
1Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints
3 WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before driving.
Controls
220
Armrest
Using the Front Seat Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest. To adjust: Slide the armrest to desired position.
Using the Rear Seat Armrest*
Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls
* Not available on all models
221
Controls
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
Interior Light Switches
Front*
OFF
Door Activated Position
Rear
Door Activated Position
ON
ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: · When any of the doors are opened. · You unlock the driver's door. · When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK). OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.
OFF
1Interior Light Switches In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the following situations:
· When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it. · When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations:
· When you lock the driver's door. · When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY
mode.
· When you set the power mode to ON.
To avoid draining the 12-volt battery, do not leave the interior lights on for an extended length of time when the power system is off.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.
222 * Not available on all models
Map Lights
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses.
1Map Lights
Models with moonroof
When the interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.
Controls
223
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
1Glove Box
3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while driving.
Controls
224
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Console Compartment
Your vehicle has a multi-function center console. It includes a storage compartment, an armrest, and a sliding tray*. Slide the armrest to the rearmost position. Pull the handle to open the console compartment.
You can put small items in the sliding tray* located in the console compartment lid. Slide the sliding tray* forward or rearward.
Controls
Sliding Tray*
You can create more storage space by removing the removable beverage holder tray and a divider.
Removable Beverage Holder Tray
Divider
* Not available on all models
Continued
225
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Front seat beverage holders Are located in the console between the front seats.
u Move the armrest rearward to use the beverage holders.
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.
To place a short beverage container: Move the removable beverage holder tray forward.
To place a tall beverage container: Move the removable beverage holder tray rearward.
Controls
226
Front Rear
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Door side beverage holders Are located on the both of the front and rear door side pockets.
Rear seat beverage holders* Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders.
Controls
* Not available on all models
Continued
227
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Accessory Power Socket
The accessory power socket can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON.
Accessory power socket (console panel) Open the cover to use it.
1Accessory Power Socket
NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent 12-volt battery drain, only use the power socket with the power system on.
Controls
228
Coat Hooks
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab handle. Pull it down to use it.
1Coat Hooks
The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items.
There are coat hooks on the left and right door pillars.
Controls
Continued
229
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Front Seat Heaters*
The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters.
1Front Seat Heaters*
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Press the seat heater button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12volt battery may be weakened, making it difficult to turn the power system on.
When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting of front seat heaters is maintained.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the front seat heaters shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.
Controls
230 * Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Rear Seat Heaters*
The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters.
There is no heater in the rear center seating position.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off. u The appropriate indicator will be on while the seat heater is on. Briefly press the switch on the opposite side to turn the heater off. The indicator will be off.
1Rear Seat Heaters*
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12volt battery may be weakened, making it difficult to turn the power system on.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and does not automatically turn off.
Controls
* Not available on all models
231
Controls
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Models without SYNC button
Dashboard vents
Dashboard and floor vents
Floor vents
Floor and defroster vents
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.
Temperature Control Dial
AUTO Button
(Recirculation) Button
Fan Control Dial
(ON/OFF) Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Use the system when the power system is on.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
3. Press the
(ON/OFF) button to cancel.
Pressing the
button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling performance.
232
Controls
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Models with SYNC button
Dashboard vents
(ON/OFF) Button
Dashboard and floor vents
Driver's Side Temperature Control Dial
AUTO Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
(Recirculation) Button
Floor vents
Floor and defroster vents
Passenger's Side Temperature Control Dial
SYNC (Synchronization) Button
Fan Control Button
Use the system when the power system is on. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver's side or passenger's side
temperature control dial. 3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.
Continued
233
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the
(recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle's interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
Controls
234
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Models without SYNC button
Pressing the button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.
Models with SYNC button
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.
Controls
Continued
235
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
To rapidly defrost the windows
Models without SYNC button
1. Press the
2. Press the
button. button.
Models with SYNC button
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.
Controls
236
Synchronization Mode*
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
1Synchronization Mode* When you press the button, the system changes to synchronization mode. When the system is in dual mode, the driver's side temperature and the passenger's side temperature can be set separately.
Controls
Driver's Side Temperature Control Dial
Passenger's Side Temperature Control Dial
SYNC Button
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver's side and the passenger's side in synchronization mode.
1. Press the SYNC button. u The system will switch to the synchronization mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using the driver's side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button or adjust the interior temperature using the passenger's side temperature control dial to return to dual mode.
* Not available on all models
237
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
Sensor
The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.
Sensor
Controls
238
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System About Your Audio System................ 240 USB Port(s) ....................................... 241 Audio System Theft Protection ......... 242 Audio Remote Controls.................... 243
Models with color audio
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 247 Audio/Information Screen ................ 248 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 252 Display Setup ................................... 253 Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 254 Playing an iPod ................................ 256 Playing Pandora®.............................. 259 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 261
* Not available on all models
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 264 Siri® Eyes Free .................................. 267
Models with Display Audio
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 268 Audio/Information Screen ................ 269 System Updates ............................... 284 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 290 Display Setup ................................... 291 Voice Control Operation .................. 293 Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 296 Playing SiriusXM® Radio* ................. 300 Playing an iPod ................................ 311 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 314 Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 317
HondaLink® ..................................... 319 HondaLink® Service*........................ 323 Wi-Fi Connection............................. 328 Siri Eyes Free.................................... 330 Apple CarPlay .................................. 331 Android Auto .................................. 334 Audio Error Messages ...................... 338 General Information on the Audio System ............................................. 343 Customized Features................ 365, 372 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*..... 392 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 395, 420 Refuel Recommend .............................. 445
239
Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio* service. It can also play USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and knobs on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface*.
Remote Controls
*1
iPod
*2
USB Flash Drive
*1 : Models with Display Audio *2 : Models with color audio
1About Your Audio System iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
SiriusXM® Radio* is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio*, contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System P. 343
SiriusXM® Radio* is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM®* is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio*, Inc.
Features
240 * Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)
USB Port(s)
Install the device USB connector or the USB flash drive to the USB port.
Models with color audio
The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on a USB flash drive, connecting a cellular phone and charging devices.
Models with color audio
Models with Display Audio
Models with Display Audio
The USB ports (2.5A) are for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
u To prevent any potential issues, be sure to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for Android Auto, the USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.
1USB Port(s)
· Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
· We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are
attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
· Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
· Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
· We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
· Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
USB charge
The USB port can supply up to 2.5A of power. It does not output 2.5A unless requested by the device. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged.
Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to.
Features
241
Features
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the 12-volt battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system. Reactivating the audio system 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the audio system power knob for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
242
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Audio Remote Controls
Models with color audio
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. SOURCE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows: FM1FM2AMUSB/iPodPandora® Bluetooth® Audio
SOURCE Button
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons Press VOL(+: To increase the volume. Press VOL(-: To decrease the volume.
(Hang-up/back) Button
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
1Audio Remote Controls Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be available.
Models with color audio
Press the (Hang-up/back) button to go back to the previous command or cancel a command.
Features
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons · When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station. · When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song. · When listening to a USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press and hold : To skip to the next folder/group. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder/group. · When listening to Pandora® Press : To skip to the next track. Press and hold : To select the next station. Press and hold : To select the previous station.
Continued
243
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Models with Display Audio
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on
the driver information interface.
(home) Button Left Selector Wheel
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons Press VOL(+: To increase the volume. Press VOL(-: To decrease the volume.
1Audio Remote Controls
Models with Display Audio
Press the (back) button for the driver information interface to go back to the previous screen or cancel a command.
Press the (home) button to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface.
(back) button
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons
Left Selector Wheel
· When selecting the audio mode
Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select Audio on the driver
information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.
Features
244
Roll up or down:
To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector wheel:
FM
AM SiriusXM®*
USB1
USB2
Bluetooth® Audio
Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
* Not available on all models
Continued
245
Features
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons · When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station. · When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio, or Smartphone Connection Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song. · When listening to a USB flash drive Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
246
Audio System Basic Operation
Models with color audio
To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
(Day/Night) Button (Sound) Button
Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK button to access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.
(Back)
MENU/
Button
CLOCK
Button Selector Knob
Menu Display
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection.
MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any mode. The available modes include wallpaper, display, clock, language setup, and play modes. Play mode choices include scan, random, repeat, and so on.
1Audio System Basic Operation These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
Menu Items 2 Adjust Clock P. 170 2 Wallpaper Setup P. 250 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 252 2 Display Setup P. 253 2 Customized Features P. 365
Press the button on the steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 243
Features
(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.
(Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode.
(Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen
brightness.
Press the
button, then adjust the brightness using .
u Each time you press the
button, the mode switches between the daytime
mode, nighttime mode and off mode.
247
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.
Switching the Display
Audio/Information Screen
Audio Clock/Wallpaper
Features
248
Audio Shows the current audio information.
Clock/Wallpaper Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
Change display 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
u If you want to return to the audio display, select Audio.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
Continued
249
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Import wallpaper You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 3. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
1Wallpaper Setup
· When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive's root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
· The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. · The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
· The individual file size limit is 2 MB. · The maximum image size is 1,920 × 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
· Up to 255 files can be selected. · The wallpaper setup is limited while driving.
Features
4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
5. Rotate to select Import, then press . u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Rotate to select a desired picture, then press . u The selected picture is displayed.
7. Press to save the picture. 8. Press to select OK. 9. Rotate to select a location to save the
picture, then press . u The display will return to the wallpaper
setting screen.
250
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 4. Rotate to select Select, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
Delete wallpaper 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 4. Rotate to select Delete, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press . 6. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.
1Wallpaper Setup To go back to the previous screen, press the (Back) button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.
Features
251
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound
(Sound) Button
Press the
(sound) button, and rotate
to scroll through the following choices:
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Features
252
Selector Knob MID is selectable.
BAS
Bass
MID
Middle
TRE
Treble
FAD
Fader
BAL
Balance
Speed-sensitive
SVC
Volume Compensation
Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then press .
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press
. 3. Rotate to select Display Adjustment,
then press . 4. Rotate to select Brightness, then press
. 5. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.
Changing the Screen's Color Theme
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press
. 3. Rotate to select Color Theme, then
press . 4. Rotate to select the setting you want,
then press .
Features
253
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio
RADIO Button Press to select a band.
Audio/Information Screen
Features
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to search up and down
the selected band for a station with a strong
signal.
Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
254
Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select the station, then press .
Update List Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Update List, then press .
Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press . 4. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press .
1Playing AM/FM Radio The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store 6 stations each.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 243
1Radio Data System (RDS) When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.
Features
255
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected.
Cover Art
Audio/Information Screen
Features
MEDIA Button Press to select iPod (if connected).
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
Play Button Press to resume a song.
Pause Button Press to pause a song.
256
Selector Knob Turn to change songs. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
Play Mode Buttons Press to select a play mode.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the Selector Knob
1. Press to display the iPod music list.
1Playing an iPod Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 338
Category Selection
2. Rotate to select a category.
Features
Item Selection
3. Press to display a list of items in the category.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed.
Continued
257
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select.
Play Mode Buttons
To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums
in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, podcasts, audiobooks, and composers) in random order.
Shuffle All: Plays all available songs in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, podcasts, audiobooks, and composers) in random order.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current song.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
Features
258
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Features
Playing Pandora®
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a compatible smartphone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port.
2 Phone Setup P. 401 2 USB Port(s) P. 241
Audio/Information Screen
Cover Art
MEDIA Button Press to select Pandora®.
Bookmark Button
Select to set a track as a bookmark.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
(Skip) Button
Press
to skip a track.
Play/Pause Button Select to resume or play a track.
Like/Dislike Buttons Select to evaluate a track.
MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
Selector Knob Turn to change a station. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.
1Playing Pandora® Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.
Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy you'll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, tracks, comedians or composers and Pandora® will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.
Continued
259
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
How to Create a Station
You can create a station when playing Pandora®. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select New Station, then press .
1How to Create a Station Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 340
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.
To change stations, press on the main Pandora® screen, and then select a new station.
Features
3. Rotate to select an item, then press . u You can select Genre, Current Artist, or Current Track.
260
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, AAC*1 or WAV format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
Audio/Information Screen
Features
MEDIA Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.
Play Mode Buttons (1-6) Press to select a play mode.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Selector Knob Turn to change files. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Continued 261
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press to display a folder list.
Folder Selection
2. Rotate to select a folder.
1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 343
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 338
Features
File Selection
262
3. Press to display a list of files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select.
Play Mode Buttons
To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.
1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Random Random in Folder: Plays all files in the
current folder in random order. Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling
of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling
of all files in the current folder.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
Features
263
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 401
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
MEDIA Button
Press to select Bluetooth Audio mode (if connected)
VOL/ (Volume/ Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
/
(Seek/
Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
Play Button (Preset 1) Press to resume a file.
Audio/Information Screen
MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. Selector Knob Turn to change groups. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection. (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display. Pause Button (Preset 2) Press to pause a file.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
Features
264
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
MEDIA Button
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
2. Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth® Audio mode is selected.
Pause Button (Preset 2) Play Button (Preset 1)
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.
To pause or resume a file Press the play button (preset 1) or pause button (preset 2) to select a mode.
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some phones.
If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
Features
Continued
265
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob
1. Press to display the music search list.
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed.
Category Selection
2. Rotate to select a category.
Features
Item Selection
266
3. Press to display a list of items in the category.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free
Siri® Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 401
Using Siri Eyes Free
(Hang-up/back) Button Press to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.
Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free
1Siri® Eyes Free Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.
1Using Siri Eyes Free Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.
This audio system cannot operate the audio functions by using Siri Eyes Free.
While in Siri Eyes Free:
The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.
(Talk) Button Press and hold until the display changes as shown.
Features
267
Audio System Basic Operation
Models with Display Audio
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
(Home) Button (Day/Night) Button
(Home) Button: Press to go to the home screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 136
(Back) Button: Press to go back to the
previous display when it is displayed.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons: Press to
change station, channel, song or file.
(Day/Night) Button: Press to change
the audio/information screen brightness.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
(Back) Button
Press
once and select or to make
an adjustment.
u Each time you press , the mode
switches among the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.
Features
268
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.
Switching the Display
Using the audio/information screen
(Home) Button
Home Screen
1Audio/Information Screen
Touchscreen Operation
· Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping,
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
· Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
· You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
use voice commands.
· Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 372
Features
All Apps
Press the button to go to the home screen. Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting
Phone Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 420
All Apps.
Continued
269
Features
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Trip Computer Displays the trip computer information. · Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. · Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives.
The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B. To reset the Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Delete Trip History. To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Trip A Reset Method or Trip B Reset Method.
Clock Displays the clock.
System Updates Updates the software version of the audio system.
2 System Updates P. 284
FM/AM/Sirius XM*/USB1/USB2/Bluetooth Audio/Smartphone Connection Displays the audio information for each.
Settings Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 372
Navigation* Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
270 * Not available on all models
HondaLink® Displays the HondaLink® screen.
2 HondaLink® P. 319
Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto screen.
2 Apple CarPlay P. 331 2 Android Auto P. 334
Messages Displays the text message screen.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 420
AT&T Hotspot* Displays the AT&T Hotspot screen.
Compass* Displays the compass screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
* Not available on all models
Continued
271
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Power Flow Displays the motor and engine power flow, average fuel economy, and range.
Engine ON
Engine
Engine OFF
1Audio/Information Screen The power flow monitor is also displayed on the driver information interface. 2 Power Flow Monitor P. 157
While the vehicle is stationary with the engine running, the following may appear on the audio/ information screen.
Features
Average Fuel Economy (Current Drive)
Power Flow High Voltage Battery Driving Range
The auto engine stop does not activate.
(Engine ON)
The auto engine stop activates.
(Engine OFF)
272
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Displays the power flow, indicating what is supplying power to the vehicle and/or charging the battery.
u The indicator for the power transmission appears in blue, and for the battery charging operation, in green.
Display
Color of indicators Vehicle's Condition
1Audio/Information Screen
While the engine provides propulsion directly to the wheels, the icon appears in the power flow monitor on the screen.
Power is being supplied by
Blue
the High Voltage battery and the engine-driven
generator.
Blue
Power is being supplied by the High Voltage battery.
Power is being supplied by
Blue
the engine-driven
generator.
Features
Continued
273
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Display
Color of indicators
Vehicle's Condition
Blue and Green
Power is being supplied directly by the engine and the High Voltage battery is being charged by the engine-driven generator.
Green
The High Voltage battery is being charged through regenerative braking.
Green
The High Voltage battery is being charged by the engine-driven generator.
Features
274
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Import wallpaper
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
2. Select Clock. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Clock Faces. 5. Select Add New Wallpaper.
u The Searching... screen is displayed.
6. Import a desired picture. u Multiple pictures can be imported at the same time.
7. Select Start Import. u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
1Wallpaper Setup
The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be displayed on the driver information interface.
· When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive's root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
· The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. · The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
· The individual file size limit is less than 2 MB. · If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
· Up to five pictures can be imported. · The maximum image size is 1,920 × 936 pixels. If
the image size is less the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
Features
Continued
275
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper 1. Select Clock. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock Faces. 4. Select a desired wallpaper. 5. Select Set.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
To view wallpaper once it is set 1. Press the button. 2. Select Clock.
Delete wallpaper 1. Select Clock. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock Faces. 4. Select a desired wallpaper. 5. Select Delete. 6. Select Yes.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
1Wallpaper Setup You cannot delete the initial imported wallpapers.
Features
276
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Home Screen
To change to a next screen
Swipe
1Home Screen The home screen has 2 or 3 pages. You can add up to 7 pages.
Press the button to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page.
> Icon
< Icon Current page position
Selecting < or > , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.
Features
Continued
277
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To add app icons on the home screen App icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Press the button. 2. Select and hold the home screen. 3. Select Add. 4. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be. 5. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home screen.
1To add app icons on the home screen
You can add app icons by the following procedure. 1. Press the button. 2. Select All Apps. 3. Select Customize. 4. Select Add. 5. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to
be. 6. Select Done. uThe screen will return to the home screen.
Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 391
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 391
In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen will return to before the browser startup.
Features
278
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To move icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
Select and hold.
3. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To move icons on the home screen Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Drag and drop.
Features
Continued
279
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To remove icons on the home screen
You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
Select and hold.
to the Hide icon. u The icon is removed from the home
screen.
3. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To remove icons on the home screen Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Drag and drop to Hide icon.
Features
280
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To shortcut icons on the home screen
You can store up to three icons on the upper left of the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to store to
Select and hold.
the upper left of the home screen. u The icon is shortcut.
Shortcut Icons
3. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home screen.
1To shortcut icons on the home screen Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Drag and drop to preset icon.
Features
Continued
281
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Status Area
1. Select the system status icon. u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Press the button or the system status
icon to close the area.
System Status Icon
Status Area
Features
282
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Customizing the Meter
You can edit, show, or hide the meter contents on the driver information interface. 1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Config. of Instrument Panel. 5. Select and hold the content you wish to show or hide. u The checked items are displayed on the driver information interface.
1Customizing the Meter
You can store up to three customized configurations. To select or customize a configuration, select Select configuration. When you select Select configuration during customization, the settings you changed will be saved.
Editing order To change the order of the contents on the driver information interface, first select:
1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Config. of Instrument Panel. 5. Select Reorder. 6. Select and hold the contents you want to
move. 7. Drag and drop the contents to where you
want it to be. 8. Select Done.
Features
283
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
System Updates
The audio system's firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection, or with a USB device.
How to Update Wirelessly
Wireless connection mode setup 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Connection Setup.
1Wireless connection mode setup
If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you do not need the wireless connection mode setup.
5. Select Change Mode. 6. Select Network, then Confirm.
u The display returns to the network list. 7. Select an access point from the network list,
then Save. u If the audio system requires a password,
enter a password.
Features
284
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
How to update
When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the audio/
information screen. Use the following procedure to update the system.
Notification
1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.
1How to update
You can update the system via Wi-Fi, but cannot use the captive portal that require login or agreement the terms of use on the browser.
Your download will be canceled if:
· Your Wi-Fi connection is severed. · You turn off the power system when the 12-volt
battery is low on power.
Your download will recommence the next time a WiFi connection is established.
3. Select via Wireless. u If a notification is displayed on the screen, the screen of step 5 will be displayed.
4. Select Download Now. u A notification appears on the screen.
Features
Continued
285
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
5. Select Install Now or Install while Vehicle OFF. u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.
1How to update
For the 12-volt battery protection, Install while Vehicle OFF cannot be selected when the battery is low on power. If you want to install the updated data, recharge the battery or select Install Now.
Features
286
Automatic download settings Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting.
1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Auto Download. 5. Select the access point, then Yes.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
View a version and update status Use the following procedure to confirm the version and update status. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Version Status.
Features
Continued
287
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
How to Update with a USB Device
Download the update files from the server 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select via USB. u A notification appears on the screen. 4. Connect a USB device into the USB port. u The inventory data is copied into the USB device.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
1How to Update with a USB Device A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space or more is recommended.
Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update files from the USB before starting the USB update process.
5. Remove the USB device from the USB port. 6. Connect the USB device into your
computer, and then download the update files. u Follow the link to download the required
software update files. Refer to https://usb.honda.com for instructions.
Features
288
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Update the audio system
1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen. 4. Connect the USB device with the update
files into the USB port. u A notification appears on the screen.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
5. Select Install Now. u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.
Features
289
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound
1. Press the button. 2. Select an audio source icon. 3. Select Sound. 4. Select the setting you want. 5. Select Save.
Select an item from the following choices: · Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass · Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader · DTS Neural Surround*: DTS Neural
SurroundTM · Speed Volume Compensation: Speed
Volume Compensation (SVC)
1Adjusting the Sound The SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
You can also adjust the sound the following procedure. 1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Sound.
To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Balance / Fader, DTS Neural Surround* and Speed Volume Compensation select Default.
Features
290 * Not available on all models
Display Setup
You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.
Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Display. 4. Select Day Mode or Night Mode. 5. Select the setting you want. 6. Select Save.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
1Changing the Screen Brightness You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner. To reset the settings, select Default.
Features
Continued
291
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Selecting an Audio Source
Select the source icon
Source Select Screen
Source List Icons
Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list.
Limitations for Manual Operation*
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Features
292 * Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (talk) and (back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.
Voice Recognition
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: · Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands.
2 Voice Portal Screen P. 294
· Close the windows and moonroof*. · Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling. · Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words. · Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
Features
* Not available on all models
Continued
293
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Voice Portal Screen
When the (talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say "Voice Help" after the beep. The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized.
Phone Commands
This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone.
Phone Commands · Phone · Call <Your Contact Name> · Call <Phone Number> The system recognize an only contact name in the stored phonebook of your phone. If full name is registered in first name field, the system will recognize the first name and last name as one contact name.
Phone commands are not available if using Apple CarPlay.
Audio Commands
When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.
FM Commands · FM · Tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
AM Commands · AM · Tune to <530-1710> AM
Sirius XM Commands* · Sirius XM · Channel <1-999> · Channel <station name>
USB Commands · USB · Play genre <Genre name> · Play Artist <Artist name> · Play Album <Album name> · Play Playlist <Playlist name> · Play Song <Song name> · Play Music · List Genre <Genre name> · List Artist <Artist name> · List Album <Album name> · List Playlist <Playlist name>
Features
294 * Not available on all models
Navigation Commands*1
The system accepts navigation command on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the navigation.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Standard Commands
· Voice Help · Cancel · Back Voice Help are readout voice guidance for Help on current screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
*1: Models with navigation system
295
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio
Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select > to display beyond preset 5.
Audio/Information Screen
Features
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.
/ Buttons Press or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Seek Icon
Select
or
to search the selected band
up or down for a station with a strong signal.
296 * Not available on all models
Settings Icon Select whether to tune to HD RadioTM* automatically.
Sound Icon Select to display the sound settings.
HD Radio Icon* Select to displays the subchannel list screen.
Station List Icon Select to displays the station list screen.
Scan Icon Select to scan each station with a strong signal.
Tune Icon Select to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the radio frequency directly.
Preset Memory
To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Station List
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select the station.
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select Refresh.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
1Preset Memory The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Roll up or down to select Audio on the left selector wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 243
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset memory.
Models with HD RadioTM feature
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and "Arc" logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Features
Continued
297
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Stop or press the button.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the station.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select Refresh.
Features
298
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Radio Frequency Manual Tune Screen
1. Select Tune. 2. Enter the desired radio frequency using the
on-screen keyboard. 3. Select Enter to tune into the frequency.
1Radio Frequency Manual Tune Screen You can tune the range of FM frequency between 87.7 to 107.9MHz and range of AM frequency between 530 to 1710kHz.
/ icons: Select or to tune the radio frequency.
Features
On-screen Keyboard
Models with HD RadioTM feature
HD Subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select HD Radio. 2. Select the channel number.
AM/FM Settings
Change the AM/FM settings. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select an option.
· HD Radio: Automatically choose a digital or an analog channel, or listen to analog only.
· Artwork: Turns the artwork display on and off.
299
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Playing SiriusXM® Radio*
Audio/Information Screen Album Art
Features
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
/ Buttons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10
channels at a time.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Channel Icons Select or to the previous or next channel. Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.
300 * Not available on all models
Settings Icon Select settings to display and customize siriusXM settings.
Sound Icon Select to display the sound settings.
Channel List Icon Select to display the channel list. Select Keypad to use the onscreen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.
Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that channel. Select > to display beyond preset 5.
Category Icons Select or to display and select a SiriusXM® Radio category.
To Change the Tune Mode
1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select Channel or Category.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Features
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio* In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode Roll up or down to select Audio on the left selector wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 243
Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Start. 3. Select ON or OFF.
To change a category, select Category icons, or select More and then select Category List.
Continued
301
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
SiriusXM® Channel Manual Tune Screen
1. Select Channel List. 2. Select Keypad. 3. Enter the desired channel number using the
on-screen keyboard. 4. Select Enter to tune into the channel.
1SiriusXM® Channel Manual Tune Screen
/ icons: Select or to the previous or next channel. Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.
Features
On-screen Keyboard
Preset Memory
To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station. 2. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel. 3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create
TuneMix. u A message appears if there are no
available presets.
302
1Preset Memory You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory.
1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) TuneMixTM is registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
TuneMix: The multi-channel preset function can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select TuneMix. 3. Select ON or OFF.
When you want to replace the channel, select Replace preset. If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix, and then select the channel you want to delete.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Listening to Featured Channels
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected. 1. Select Category List. 2. Select Featured Favorites.
1Listening to Featured Channels Up to ten featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed.
Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list.
To switch the sorting method, select Number or Name on the upper right of the screen.
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.
Features
Continued
303
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Replay Function
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.
Move the position you want to replay by selecting
or .
To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon.
Returning to real-time broadcast Select and hold .
1Replay Function The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.
You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.
Audio/Information Screen (A)
Features
304
(C) (D) (B)
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory (D): Play/Pause icon
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Live Sports Alert
While listening to other channel, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.
To set up a favorite team
1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Favorite Teams. 4. Select + Add Favorite Team. 5. Select a team.
1Live Sports Alert The Pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert function.
1To set up a favorite team Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on.
To set up an alert message 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications. 5. Select Notifications. 6. Select ON. 7. Select a favorite team.
Features
Continued
305
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Traffic and Weather Information
You can receive traffic and weather information. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Traffic & Weather Now Setup. 3. Select Selected City. 4. Select the region.
1Traffic and Weather Information When traffic and weather information is received, a notification is displayed in the header area. 2 Status Area P. 282
Traffic & Weather Now are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
Features
306
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Channel Schedule
You can view a channel schedule or receive a alert when your favorite program is about to start.
To view a channel schedule
1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule.
1Channel Schedule
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.
Features
To set up an alert message 1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule. 3. Select a program. 4. Select Set Program Alert. 5. Select Just Once or Everytime.
1To set up an alert message The Pop-up appears and notifies you of an alert function.
Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON.
If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.
To enable an alert message, change settings for the alert function.
2 To enable the alert function P. 308
Continued
307
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Manage Program Alert
You can change settings for the alert function.
To enable the alert function
1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select ON or OFF.
To remove an alert
1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Alerts Set. 4. Select on the alert you want to delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
Features
308
Scan
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select More. 2. Select Scan.
You can change a scan mode by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Scan Mode. 3. Select Channel or Preset.
To turn off scan, select Stop.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
1Scan The "Scan Songs in Presets" function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®. The "Featured Channels" function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®. TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
Features
Continued
309
Features
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
SiriusXM Settings
Change the SiriusXM settings. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select an option. · Tune Mix: Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off. · Tune Mode: Choose whether to group by category or channel number when
changing channels. · Scan Mode: Select the scan mode from all channels or presets. · Tune Start: Start the currently playing song at the beginning when you switch to
a music channel preset. · Sports Notifications Setup: Set to receive sports alerts such as scores from your
favorite teams.
2 Live Sports Alert P. 305
· Traffic & Weather Now Setup: Set to receive traffic and weather information.
2 Traffic and Weather Information P. 306
· Manage Program Alerts: Change settings for the alert function.
2 Manage Program Alert P. 308
310
Playing an iPod
Using your USB connector, connect the iPod to the USB ports, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
Cover Art
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Audio/Information Screen
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Track Buttons
Press
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Browse Icon Select to display the music search list screen.
Track Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
Sound Icon Select to display the sound settings.
Shuffle Icon Select to play all songs in the current category in random order. Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current song. Play/Pause Icon
Continued 311
Features
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,
Albums, etc.). 3. Continue making selections until you find a
file of your choice.
1Playing an iPod Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 338
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/ USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay.
Features
312
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a song. Shuffle/Repeat Select shuffle or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle
(shuffle off): Shuffle mode to off. (shuffle all songs): Plays all available songs in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.
Repeat (repeat off): Repeat mode to off. (repeat song): Repeats the current song. (repeat all): Repeats the all songs.
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.
Features
313
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, AAC*1, FLAC or WAV format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB ports, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
Features
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
/ Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Browse Icon Select to display the music search list screen.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. 314
Audio/Information Screen
Sound Icon Select to display the sound settings.
Random Icon
Select to play all files in the current category in random order.
Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.
Play/Pause Icon
Track Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,
Albums, etc.). 3. Continue making selections until you find
the file of your choice.
1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 343
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays The selected file cannot be played, then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 338
Features
Continued
315
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file. Random/Repeat Select random or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Random
(random off): Random mode to off. (random all files): Plays all files in random order. (random in folder): Plays all files in the current folder in random order.
Repeat (repeat off): Repeat mode to off. (repeat file): Repeats the current file. (repeat folder): Repeats all files in the current
folder.
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.
Features
316
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 425
Audio/Information Screen
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.
/ Buttons Press or
to change tracks.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Play/Pause Icon
Track Icons
Select
or
to
change tracks.
Browse Icon
Select to display the menu items.
The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be different.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone will be unavailable. However, you can have a second previously paired phone stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting from the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 425
Continued
Features
317
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 425
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
To pause or resume a file Select the play/pause icon.
Searching for Music
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.
1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 3. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
You can change the connected phone by selecting Change device.
2 Phone Setup P. 425
1Searching for Music Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
Features
318
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 328 2 Phone Setup P. 425
To Connect to HondaLink®
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink®.
To enable the HondaLink® You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink®.
Disable: Does not allow this consent. Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Never show again.)
1HondaLink® If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you can use HondaLink® without connecting the phone.
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.
If the system is connected to the HondaLink® connect app through Bluetooth® and another Bluetooth® audio device is connected, the Bluetooth® connection to the HondaLink® connect app will be severed.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone's data subscription package.
Features
Continued
319
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
To link with HondaLink®
You may see the connection guide screen after launching HondaLink® when there is no connection available.
HondaLink® Menu
Features
Connect Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.
Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center.
320
Message Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A notification appears and notifies you of a new message on the header area.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Notification
2. A notification is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read.
Features
Continued
321
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
3. Select the system status icon to see the messages.
1Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
When you update HondaLink®, you must keep the power system on and maintain a constant connection with HondaLink®. If the update is interrupted, the system will automatically resume the process. If, however, a week has elapsed since the process was first interrupted, you must repeat the process from the beginning.
4. Select a new message to open. u If you have selected the update option for HondaLink®, follow the directions on the screen to complete the process.
You can update HondaLink® by selecting Message from Honda on the HondaLink® menu.
Features
322
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service*
HondaLink® Service*
Is a subscription-based service that provides convenient features such as voice communication in case of emergency, online security, and one-on-one operator assistance.
1HondaLink® Service*
HondaLink® also provides services you can operate from the Internet or your smartphone.
In Case of Emergency
Automatic collision notification If your vehicle's airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink® operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.
IMPORTANT: In a crash, HondaLink® will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
To subscribe to HondaLink®, or to get more information about all of its features, contact an Honda dealer, or visit hondalink.honda.com
1In Case of Emergency Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the 12-volt battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.
You cannot use this emergency services when:
· You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage
areas.
· There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.
*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle's location may not be sent to the operator.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Only the operator can terminate the connection to your vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
Features
* Not available on all models
Continued
323
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service*
Manual operator connection
ASSIST Button
If you need to talk to the HondaLink® operator in a situation where no airbag has deployed, you can manually connect to them by pressing the ASSIST button with the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON. 1. Open the cover attached to the ceiling
console. 2. Press the ASSIST button.
u You are connected to the HondaLink® operator.
1Manual operator connection Do not press the button while driving. When you need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a safe place.
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it automatically cancels the action after three minutes.
If necessary, the cover can be broken to access the ASSIST button.
Features
324
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service*
Security Features
Your subscribed telematics service provider can track your vehicle's location, remotely lock or unlock doors, and help you find your vehicle. To use these features, you need your user ID and personal identification number (PIN).
Stolen vehicle tracking This feature searches and tracks down your vehicle position even if it is on the move. If you believe that your vehicle has been stolen, contact the police as well as the provider.
1Security Features
The contact information of your provider, your user ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to HondaLink®. If you forget any of the above, contact a Honda dealer, or go to hondalink.honda.com.
You can also activate the remote door lock/unlock and vehicle finder features from the Internet or using your smartphone app. Ask a dealer, or visit hondalink.honda.com.
Remote door lock/unlock The provider can remotely lock or unlock doors upon your request.
Vehicle finder This feature is convenient to use when trying to locate your vehicle in large areas, such as a crowded parking lot. If you cannot locate your vehicle after using the remote transmitter's answerback function, you can contact the provider which can then flash your vehicle's exterior lights and sound the horn, and sends vehicle location via web/Smartphone.
Security alarm notification If the security system in your vehicle detects an abnormal condition, such as someone tampering with the lock on your vehicle, the provider notifies you by email.
1Vehicle finder
The lights will stop flashing and horn will stop sounding under the following:
· When conditions 30 seconds have elapsed. · You unlock the doors using the remote transmitter. · You unlock the doors using the smart entry system. · You unlock the doors using the built-in key. · The power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON.
Features
Continued
325
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service*
Operator Assistance
Connect to the HondaLink® operator when trying to find a destination or for
roadside assistance.
1. Press the LINK button.
LINK Button
u Connection to the operator begins. 2. Talk to the operator.
u To disconnect, select Hang Up on the
audio/information screen or press the
button on the steering wheel.
1Operator Assistance Remain attentive to road conditions and driving during operator assistance.
If you want to add or renew a subscription, call the Operator Assistance. 1. Press the button. 2. Select HondaLink. 3. Select HondaLink Subscription Status.
Features
Audio/information screen when connected to the HondaLink® operator.
326
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service*
Convenient Features
Your subscribed telematics service provider can check your vehicle's condition.
Virtual Dashboard You can remotely check the mileage, fuel range, and oil life in your app.
1Convenient Features
The contact information of your provider, your user ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to HondaLink®. If you forget any of the above, contact a Honda dealer, or go to hondalink.honda.com.
Remote Start and stop the engine You can remotely turn on and off the power system using your app as same as the smart entry key.
Geofence Alert You can receive a notification anytime your vehicle enters or leaves a region set by you.
Speed Alert You can receive a notification when your vehicle has exceeded a speed limit set by you.
Personal Data Wipe You can reset your audio and navigation system settings to factory defaults with the app.
Wi-Fi hotspot Vehicle provides 4G LTE network environment as Wi-Fi router to use tablet or smartphone in your vehicle.
Features
327
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the audio system to the Internet using Wi-Fi on the audio/ information screen. If your phone has wireless hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup.
1Wi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Wi-Fi. 5. Select Change Mode. 6. Select Network or Hotspot, then
Confirm. u To change the Wi-Fi settings, select
Network Options or HotSpot Options. u Select the access point you want to connect to the system.
7. Select Connect. u Enter a password for the access point, and select Done. u When the connection is successful, the icon is displayed on the list.
8. Press the button to go back to the home screen.
1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time) You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the audio system in Wi-Fi mode.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone's data subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.
You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or off with the icon on the Wi-Fi network list. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen.
In case of Wi-Fi connection with your phone, make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.
Features
328
Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
iPhone users
You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-Fi connection again after you boot your phone.
Features
329
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free
Siri Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using to press and hold the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 425
1Siri Eyes Free Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.
While driving we recommend only using Siri through the button on the steering wheel (Siri Eyes Free).
Using Siri Eyes Free
(Back) Button Press to deactivate Siri.
1Using Siri Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.
Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free
Features
(Talk) Button Press and hold until the display changes as shown.
330
While in Siri Eyes Free:
The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the USB port, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
Apple CarPlay Menu
1Apple CarPlay Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.
Home screen
Apple CarPlay menu screen
To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
Apple CarPlay icon
Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen
Select the Honda icon to go back to the home screen
Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.
Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
Music Play music stored on your iPhone.
While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 332
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 425
For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
Features
Continued
331
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Maps Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.
Models with navigation system
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.
Setting Up Apple CarPlay
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the USB port, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.
Enabling Apple CarPlay
Check the checkbox. Enable: Allows this consent. Disable: Does not allow this consent.
1Apple CarPlay Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier's rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.
1Setting Up Apple CarPlay You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlay: Press the HOME Select Settings Connections Smartphone Connection Apple CarPlay Select device Edit Device Permissions
Features
You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple's Privacy Policy.
332
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri.
(Talk) button: Press and hold to activate Siri. Press again to deactivate Siri. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri:
· What movies are playing today? · Call dad at work. · What song is this? · How's the weather tomorrow? · Read my latest email. · Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.
Features
333
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Android Auto
When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 336
1Android Auto To use Android Auto, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android Auto phone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.
To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241
When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 425
Features
334
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features
Android Auto Menu
1Android Auto
For details on countries and regions where Android
6
Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to
function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.
Android Auto icon
: Go back to the home screen
a Maps (Navigation) Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.
Models with navigation system
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. The audio/information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination. b Phone (Communication) Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail. c Google Now (Home screen) Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when they're needed.
Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier's rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
Continued
335
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features
d Music and audio Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto. To switch between music apps, press this icon. e Go back to the Home Screen. f Voice Operate Android Auto with your voice.
Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated.
Enabling Android Auto
Check the checkbox. Enable: Allows this consent. Disable: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.
1Enabling Android Auto
Only initialize Android Auto when you safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.
You can use the method below to change Android Auto settings after you have completed the initial setup: Press the HOME Select Settings Connections Smartphone Connection Android Auto Select device Edit Device Permissions
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Google's Privacy Policy.
336
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Press and hold the talk button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
(Talk) button: Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition:
· Reply to text. · Call my wife. · Navigate to Honda. · Play my music. · Send a text message to my wife. · Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Features
337
Features
Audio Error Messages
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Solution
USB Error Please check owners manual*1
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Unsupported Ver*1
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.
Connect Retry*1, *2
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File*1 The selected file cannot be played.*2
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about three or five seconds, then plays the next song.
No Song*1
iPod
Appears when the iPod is empty.
USB flash drive
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty.
iPod and USB flash drive
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported*1
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected, reconnect the device. Appears when unsupported formats are in the device. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
*1:Models with color audio *2:Models with Display Audio
338
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Error Message
Device No Response*1, *2
HUB Unsupported*1 USB hub not supported/USB hub is not supported.*2 *1:Models with color audio *2:Models with Display Audio
Solution
Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.
Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the HUB.
Features
339
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Models with color audio
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Solution
No Device Connected
Appears when no device is connected. Check the Bluetooth® and USB connection.
No Data
Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot the app and reconnect the device.
To begin listening, select a station from the stations list.
Appears when any station is not selected. Select a station from the station list on the device.
PANDORA ver unsupport.
Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora® to the latest version.
No station list on device. Use device to create station.
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station.
PANDORA system maintenance.
Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.
Unable to play PANDORA. When stopped, log-in to PANDORA.
Appears you do not log in to Pandora®. Log in to Pandora®.
No network connectivity.
Appears when the network is deteriorated. Move the vehicle and check the reception of the signal.
Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.
Appears when the sending the data is failed for ten times and the device may have a malfunction. Try again later. Move the vehicle and check the reception of the signal.
Features
340
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Error Message
Unable to play PANDORA. Music licensing restricts play in this area.
USB Error Please check owners manual
Solution
Appears when the vehicle is in the restricted area to listen the music. Move the vehicle and check the reception of the signal.
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. If there is any problem with the connected device itself, the audio system may not be able to detect it. Contact a dealer.
Features
341
uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps
Models with Display Audio
Android/Apps
If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Solution
Unfortunately, **** has stopped.*1
Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.
**** is not responding. Would you like to close it?*1
App is not responding. Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 391
*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs.
Features
342
General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service*
Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the screen, select Channel to 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe.
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Channel **** is not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.*1 You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Updated: SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network. Channel Not Available: No such channel exits, or the artist or title information is unavailable. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Check Tuner: There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer. Antenna Disconnected, Antenna Shorted: There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
· US: SiriusXM® Radio at
www.siriusxm.com/subscribenow, or 1-866-6352349
· Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at
www.siriusxm.ca/subscribe-now, or 1-877-2090079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances:
· In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
· In tunnels · On the lower level of a multi-tiered road · Large items carried on the roof rack
Features
*1 : ****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an subscribe.
* Not available on all models
343
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
iPod, and iPhone Model Compatibility
Models with color audio
Model iPod (5th generation) iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007) iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008) iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009) iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012 iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012 iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5
1iPod, and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
Models with Display Audio
Model iPod touch (5th to 6th generation) released between 2012 and 2015 iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/ iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus
USB Flash Drives
· A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. · Some digital audio players may not be compatible. · Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. · Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. · Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.
Features
344
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Honda App License Agreement
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS "AGREEMENT") WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR "VEHICLE") AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE "SERVICES"). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., ("HONDA," "US," "WE," OR "OUR"), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO "HONDA" IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA'S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A "PROVIDER"). REFERENCE TO A "PROVIDER" IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER'S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.
A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a "DEALER"). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, "HONDA SERVICES"); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, "PROVIDER SERVICES"), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property. 1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the "HONDA TERMS"). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.
Continued 345
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA's distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.
4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the "PROVIDER TERMS"). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use. (a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any "DOCUMENTATION"). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
346
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION; (2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else's use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES; (3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way; (4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights; (5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations; (6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or (7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.
Continued 347
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation 1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver's license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.
4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.
348
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties') use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-theair, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA's discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings 1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle's current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed ("VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION") to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
Continued 349
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
350
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
E. Information Collection and Storage 1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
(a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE ("VEHICLE INFORMATION") to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle's geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE's multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES's multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE's multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
Continued 351
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE's multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, noninfringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights. 1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney's fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
352
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
Continued 353
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE's compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
K. Termination and Transfer. 1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
354
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
M. ARBITRATION: PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION. Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act ("FAA") applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. "Claim" means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. "Claim" does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.
Continued 355
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA. This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.
N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA's prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.
356
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Models with Display Audio
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
OWNER'S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
Continued 357
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO ("THE APPLICATIONS") IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE," WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
358
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
Models with color audio
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select License, then press .
Models with Display Audio
1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select About. 5. Select Legal Information. 6. Select License.
1About Open Source Licenses
Models with Telematics Control Unit
Free/Open Source Software Information
This product contains Free/Open Source Software(FOSS). The license information and/or the source code of such FOSS can be found at the following URL.
https://www.denso.com/global/en/opensource/tcu/ honda/
Features
359
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*
License Information*
DOLBY DIGITAL
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
360 * Not available on all models
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PANASONIC CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Windows Media
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.
Features
Continued
361
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*
Apple
"Made for iPod," and "Made for iPhone," mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance. Apple, the Apple Logo, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
362
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*
MPEG
Mpeg4 Visual THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD ("MPEG-4 VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
VC-1 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD ("VC-1 VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
Features
Continued
363
Features
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*
AVC/H.264 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
SDHC Memory Card
microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
364
Customized Features
Models with color audio
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
How to customize While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings, press the button, then select Phone Setup.
Audio/Information Screen
(Phone) Button
1Customized Features When you customize settings:
· Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop. · Put the transmission into (P.
1How to customize These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
Features
Selector Knob MENU/CLOCK Button
Continued
365
uuCustomized Featuresu
Customization Flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button. Adjust Clock Settings
RDS Settings Bluetooth Setup Display Adjustment Rear Camera
RDS Information Radio Text
Add New Device Connect an Audio Device
Brightness Contrast Black Level
Camera Guideline
Features
366
Display Change Wallpaper Color Theme
Language Clock Format License
uuCustomized Featuresu
Audio Wallpaper
Select Import Delete Blue Red Amber Violet Bluegreen
12h 24h
Continued 367
Features
uuCustomized Featuresu
Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Bluetooth Setup
Add New Device Connect a Phone Connect an Audio Device Disconnect All Devices Delete Device Pass-Key
Speed Dial
Ringtone
Mobile Phone Fixed
Caller ID Info
Name Priority Number Priority
Auto Transfer
System Clear
Features
368
uuCustomized Featuresu
List of customizable options
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Adjust Clock
RDS Settings
RDS Information Radio Text
Settings
Bluetooth Setup
Add New Device
Connect an Audio Device
Brightness
Display Adjustment
Contrast
Black Level
Rear Camera
*1:Default Setting
Camera Guideline
Description
Selectable Settings
Adjust Clock.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 170
--
Selects whether the RDS information comes on.
On*1/Off
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
--
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a code for a paired
--
phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 401
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.
--
Changes the brightness of the audio/ information screen.
--
Changes the contrast of the audio/ information screen.
--
Changes the black level of the audio/ information screen.
--
Selects whether the guidelines come on the audio/information screen.
On*1/Off
Features
Continued 369
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
Customizable Features Display Change
Select
Wallpaper Import
Settings
Delete Color Theme
Language
Clock Format
License *1:Default Setting
Description
Selectable Settings
Changes the display type.
Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 250
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Changes the background color of the audio/ information screen. Changes the display language. Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. Shows the legal information.
Audio*1/Wallpaper Clock*1/Image 1/Image 2/ Image 3
--
Image 1/Image 2/Image 3 Blue/Red/Amber*1/Violet/ Bluegreen English*1/French/Spanish
12h*1/24h
--
Features
370
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
Customizable Features Add New Device
Phone Setup
Bluetooth Setup
Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device Disconnect All Devices Delete Device Pass-Key
Speed Dial
Ringtone
Caller ID Info
Auto Transfer
System Clear
*1:Default Setting
Description
Selectable Settings
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 401
--
Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone
to HFL.
--
2 Phone Setup P. 401
Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.
--
Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.
--
Deletes a paired phone.
--
Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone.
--
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Speed Dial P. 411
--
Selects a fixed ring tone or the one from the connected cell phone.
Mobile Phone*1/Fixed
Prioritizes the caller's name or phone number Name Priority*1/Number
as the caller ID.
Priority
Sets calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
On*1/Off
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone Setup group as default.
--
Features
371
Customized Features
Models with Display Audio
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features. How to customize With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item.
1Customized Features When you customize settings:
· Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop. · Put the transmission into (P.
To customize features detail, refer to the following. 2 Customization flow P. 373 2 List of customizable options P. 379
Audio/Information Screen
Features
372
Customization flow
Press the button. Select Settings.
System
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
Day & Time
Set Date & Time
Time Zone
Language Touch Panel Sensitivity
System Volumes
Config. of Instrument Panel
Security
Auto Daylight Saving Time
Date Format Time Format
System Volumes Reading/Warning Select configuration
Password Unknown sources
Automatic Date & Time
Set Date Set Time Automatic Time
Zone* (Select time zone)
Verbal Reminder
Continued 373
Features
uuCustomized Featuresu
Accessibility
Caption Text-to-speech output
Refuel recommend*
About
Factory Data Reset
Detail Information
Status Legal Information
App Manager Recent Location Requests Apps
Caption Language Text Size Caption style
Features
374 * Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
Connections Display Sound
* Not available on all models
Features
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Smartphone Connection
Day Mode Night Mode Bass / Treble
Balance / Fader DTS Neural Surround*
Speed Volume Compensation
Change Mode (Available Networks/Connected Devices)
Options
Bluetooth
+ Connect New Device
(Saved Devices)
Apple CarPlay Android Auto
Treble Midrange
Bass Subwoofer*
Continued 375
uuCustomized Featuresu
Vehicle
TPMS Calibration Driver Assist System Setup
Meter Setup
Blind Spot Info Traffic Sign Recognition System Forward Collision Warning Distance ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Driver Attention Monitor
Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Adjust Alarm Volume Reverse Alert Tone
Config. of Instrument Panel Fuel Efficiency Backlight "Trip A" Reset Timing "Trip B" Reset Timing Speed/Distance Units
Features
376
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
Keyless Access Setup
Lighting Setup
Door/Window Setup
Maintenance Info.
Door Unlock Mode Smart Entry Light Flash
Smart Entry Beep Remote Start System ON/OFF
Auto Light Sensitivity* Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
Auto Headlight On with Wiper On Headlight Auto OFF Timer
Interior Light Dimming Time
Auto Door Lock Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer Auto Door Unlock Walk Away Auto Lock
Select Reset Items
Features
Continued 377
uuCustomized Featuresu
Camera
Rear Camera
Cross Traffic Monitor
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline
Features
378
uuCustomized Featuresu
List of customizable options
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
System Day & Time
Set Date & Time
Time Zone
Automatic Date & Time
Set Date
Set Time
Automatic Time Zone (Select time zone)
Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.
Adjusts date.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 170
Adjusts clock.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 170
Sets the audio system to automatically adjust the clock when driving through different time zones.
Changes the time zone manually.
ON*1/OFF -- --
ON*1/OFF --
Auto Daylight Saving Time
Select ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock to daylight savings time. Select OFF to cancel this function.
ON*1/OFF
*1:Default Setting
Features
Continued 379
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Day & Time
Date Format Time Format
Sets the date format. Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.
Language System
Changes the display language.
Touch Panel Sensitivity
System Volumes
Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.
System Volumes
Changes the system sounds volume.
Reading/ Warning
Verbal Reminder
Turns the verbal reminders on and off.
*1:Default Setting *2:Default Setting for U.S. models *3:Default Setting for Canadian models
Selectable Settings
MM/DD/YYYY*2/ DD/MM/YYYY*3/ YYYY/MM/DD 12H*1/24H English (United States)*1/Español/ Français
High/Low*1
--
ON*1/OFF
Features
380 * Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
Config. of Instrument Panel
Select configuration
Selects whether the apps display comes on or not Config.1*1/Config.2/
on the driver information interface.
Config.3
Security
Password Unknown sources
Set the value of password display. --
ON*1/OFF ON/OFF*1
Caption Turns the subtitles on and off.
ON/OFF*1
Features
Language Change the subtitle language.
Default*1/English (United States)/ Español/Français
System Accessibility
Text Size Change the subtitle Text Size. Caption
Caption style
Change the subtitle Caption style.
Very small/Small/ Normal*1/Large
Use app defaults/ White on black*1/ Black on white/ Yellow on black/ Yellow on blue/ Custom
Text-tospeech output
Current TTS engine TtsService
TtsService
--
--
*1:Default Setting * Not available on all models
Continued 381
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
System
Customizable Features
Refuel recommend*
About
Factory Data Reset
Status Legal Information
Detail Information
*1:Default Setting
App Manager
Recent Location Requests Apps
Description
Selectable Settings
Turns the refuel recommend function on and off.
2 Refuel Recommend P. 445
ON*1/OFF
Displays the Android setting items.
--
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 391
Displays the Android system memory and apps information.
Displays the recent location requests from apps.
Continue/Cancel -- --
Features
382 * Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Wi-Fi
Connec-
tions
Bluetooth
Smartphone Connection
*1:Default Setting
Change Mode
Changes the Wi-Fi mode.
(Available Networks/ Connected Devices)
Displays the available network(s) or current connected device(s).
Options Bluetooth Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.
+ Connect New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 425
(Saved Devices)
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 425
Apple CarPlay
Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection.
Android Auto
Sets up the Android Auto connection.
Selectable Settings Network*1/Hotspot/ OFF
-- ON*1/OFF
--
-- -- --
Features
Continued 383
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group Display
Sound
Customizable Features
Day Mode
Night Mode
Treble
Bass / Treble
Midrange Bass
Subwoofer*
Balance / Fader
DTS Neural Surround*
Speed Volume Compensation
Vehicle
TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist Traffic Sign System Setup Recognition System
*1:Default Setting
Description
Selectable Settings
Changes between the daytime mode and nighttime
mode.
--
2 Display Setup P. 253
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers' sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 290
--
Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).
Select On/Off to indicate small displaying traffic sign icon on the driver information interface.
Calibrate/Cancel
Small Icons ON*1/ Small Icons OFF
Features
384 * Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
Blind Spot Info
Changes the setting for the blind spot information.
Audible and Visual Alert*1/Visual Alert
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Changes Collision Mitigation Braking System (CMBSTM) alert distance.
Normal*1/Short/ Long
Driver Assist System Setup
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.
Causes the system to beep when Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is suspended.
ON/OFF*1 ON/OFF*1
Features
Vehicle
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.
Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only/ Narrow
Driver Attention Monitor
Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.
OFF/Tactile Alert/ Tactile And Audible Alert*1
Language Selection Changes the display language.
English*1/Français/ Español
Meter Setup
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.) -3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada)
*1:Default Setting * Not available on all models
Continued 385
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Adjust Alarm Volume
Changes the alarm volume, such as the buzzers, warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.
Reverse Alert Tone Turns the reverse alert tone on and off.
Config. of Instrument Panel
Selects whether the apps display comes on or not on the driver information interface.
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.
Vehicle Meter Setup
"Trip A" Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and average fuel economy A.
"Trip B" Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and average fuel economy B.
*1:Default Setting
Speed/Distance Units Selects the trip computer units.
Selectable Settings
High/Mid*1/Low
ON*1/OFF Config.1*1/Config.2/ Config.3
ON*1/OFF
When Fully Refueled/Manually Reset*1/IGN OFF
When Fully Refueled/Manually Reset*1/IGN OFF
km/h·km/ mph·miles*1 (U.S.) km/h·km*1/ mph·miles (Canada)
Features
386
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver's door handle.
Driver Door Only*1/ All Doors
Vehicle
Keyless Access Setup
Smart Entry Light Flash
Smart Entry Beep
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the doors.
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.
ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF
Remote Start System ON/OFF
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.
ON*1/OFF
*1:Default Setting
Features
Continued 387
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Auto Light Sensitivity*
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
Vehicle
Lighting Setup
Auto Headlight On with Wiper On
*1:Default Setting
Headlight Auto OFF Timer
Interior Light Dimming Time
Description
Selectable Settings
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Min/Low/Mid*1/ High/Max
Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the instrument panel when the headlight switch is in AUTO.
Min/Low/Mid*1/ High/Max
Used to automatically come on the headlights when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch is in AUTO.
ON*1/OFF
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay 0sec/15sec*1/30sec/
on after you close the driver's door.
60sec
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.
15sec/30sec*1/60sec
Features
388 * Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
Auto Door Lock
Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature.
OFF/With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift From P
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in key.
Driver Door Only*1/ All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
Back
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
ON*1/OFF
Vehicle
Door/Window Setup
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock Security Relock Timer and the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically.
30sec*1/60sec/90sec
OFF/All Doors When Driver's Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shifted to Park/All Doors With IGN OFF
Walk Away Auto Lock
Changes the settings for the auto lock function when you walk away from the vehicle.
ON/OFF*1
Maintenance Info.
Select Reset Items
Resets the Maintenance MinderTM display when you have performed the maintenance service.
--
*1:Default Setting
Continued 389
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Rear Camera Camera
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline
Cross Traffic Monitor *1:Default Setting
Description
Selectable Settings
Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 554
Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 554
Turns the cross traffic monitor feature on and off.
ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF
Features
390
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Models with Display Audio
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
Defaulting System Settings
1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
5. Select Continue to reset the settings. 6. Select Continue again to reset the settings.
u The system will reboot.
1Defaulting All the Settings When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.
2 HondaLink® P. 319
Defaulting Vehicle Settings
1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Vehicle. 4. Select Default. 5. Select Yes.
Features
391
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.
Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an "electronic eye," or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door's path.
Features
392 * Not available on all models
Training HomeLink
I HomeLink Button Indicator
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink
If it is necessary to erase a previously entered learned code: · Press and hold the I and III HomeLink
buttons for about 10 seconds, until the green indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1. · If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.
III HomeLink Button
The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.
Features
Continued
393
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink
Programming a Button
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink® button you want to program.
Features
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly flashing orange?
YES
NO
3a. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
4. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a second. Does the device (garage door opener) work?
3b. Canadian Garage Door Opener A. Press and release the HomeLink button. Press, hold and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
YES
NO
Training Complete
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
HomeLink LED is continuously on green.
HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes green.
6. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate.
Training Complete
394
5a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the "learn" button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).
5b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
1Training HomeLink
Reprogramming a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash orange. This should take about 20 seconds.
2. Release the HomeLink button and position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 - 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program, then follow steps 3 - 6 under "programming a button."
Erasing Button Memory To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink indicator changes from orange to rapidly flashing green. This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all programming before selling the vehicle.
Operating To operate, simple press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device.
Questions For questions or comments, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline (North America only) at (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Features
Models with color audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
HFL Buttons
(Pick-up) Button Volume up
Microphone (Phone) Button
Volume down (Talk) Button (Hang-up/Back) Button
Selector Knob
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. (Phone) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1888-528-7876.
Voice control tips
· Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
· Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
· If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
· To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 411
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.
Continued
395
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display
Battery Level Status
Signal Strength
Roam Status Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. HFL Mode Call Name
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
1HFL Status Display The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.
Features
Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 411
396
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.
or
Speed Dial*1
Add New
Call History
1HFL Menus To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.
Phonebook
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Call History*1
(Existing entry list)
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial Phone Number number.
Dialed Calls
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Features
Received Calls Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Phonebook*1
Missed Calls Display the last 20 missed calls. Display the paired phones's phonebook.
Dial*1
Enter a phone number to dial.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued
397
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Redial*1
Redial the last number dialed in the phone's history.
Phone Setup
Bluetooth Setup
Add New Device
Pair a phone to the system.
Features
Connect a Phone
Connect a phone to the system.
Connect an Audio Device
Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the system.
Disconnect All Devices Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Delete Device
Delete a previously paired phone.
*1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
398
Pass-key
Create a code for a paired phone.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Speed Dial*1
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Add New Call History
Phonebook
Phone Number
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Existing entry list Change Speed Dial
Change a previously stored speed dial number.
Delete Speed Dial
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Features
Store Voice Tag
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Change Voice Tag
Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete Voice Tag
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Continued 399
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Ringtone
Mobile Phone Fixed
Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone.
Select the ring tone stored in HFL.
Caller ID Info
Name Priority
Prioritize the caller's name as the caller ID.
Number Priority
Prioritize the caller's phone number as the caller ID.
Auto Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
Features
400
System Clear
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security codes.
Phone Setup
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
To pair a cell phone (No phone has been paired to the system)
1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 3. Rotate to select Add New Device,
then press . 4. Press to select OK. 5. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode. u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device. 6. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing . u If your phone doesn't appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink®.
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
· You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
· Up to six phones can be paired. · Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
· If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within 30 seconds, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
7. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
8. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.
Continued
401
Features
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system) 1. Press the button or the button. u If a prompt appears asking to connect to a phone, select No and proceed with step 2. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . 4. Rotate to select Add New Device, then press . u The screen changes to device list. 5. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device.
402
6. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink®.
7. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by a phone.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Continued
403
Features
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To change the currently paired phone 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Connect a Phone, then press . u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate to select a desired device name, then press . u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.
404
To change the pairing code setting 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Pass-Key, then press .
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
5. Input a new pairing code, then press .
Features
Continued
405
Features
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To delete a paired phone 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Delete Device, then press . u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press .
6. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
406
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Ringtone, then press . 4. Rotate to select Fixed or Mobile Phone, then press .
1Ring Tone
Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected. Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
Caller's ID Information
You can select a caller's information to be displayed when you have an incoming call.
1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then
press . 4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then
press .
1Caller's ID Information
Name Priority: A caller's name is displayed if it is stored in the phonebook. Number Priority: A caller's phone number is displayed.
Features
Continued
407
Features
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Auto Transfer. 4. Press to select On or Off.
408
To Clear the System
Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select System Clear, then
press . 4. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
6. A notification appears on the screen. Press .
Continued
409
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
Pref Home Mobile Work Pager
Fax Car Other Voice
If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears instead of category icons.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Features
410
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select Add New, then press . 4. Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press . From Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Phonebook: u Select a number from the connected cell phone's imported phonebook. From Phone Number: u Input the number manually.
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the button and call the number using voice commands.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry.
Features
Continued
411
Features
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To edit a speed dial 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Change Speed Dial,
then press . 6. Select a new speed dial number, then press
.
To delete a speed dial number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press . u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
412
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number
1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then
press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using "home" as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use "John Smith" instead of "John."
To change a voice tag 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Change Voice Tag,
then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
Features
Continued
413
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To delete a voice tag 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press . u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
Features
414
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To make a call using the imported phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then
press . 3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate to select the initial, then press .
4. Rotate to select a name, then press . 5. Rotate to select a number, then press
. u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press
. 4. Rotate to select , then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands. 2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 396 2 Speed Dial P. 411
1To make a call using a phone number This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands. 2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 396 2 Speed Dial P. 411
Features
Continued
415
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To make a call using redial 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed in your phone's call history.
To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Call History, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press . 4. Rotate to select a number, then press
. u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls.
Features
416
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 3. Rotate to select a number, then press
. u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a speed dial entry Select Others to view another paired phone's speed dial list.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button and call the number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 411
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
Features
Continued
417
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Receiving a Call
HFL Mode
Caller's Name
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds and the Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the Press the
button to answer the call. button to decline or end the call.
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons. Rotate
to select the icon, then press .
Features
418
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call. Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the button.
2. Rotate to select the option, then press .
u The Mute option is highlighted when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
1Options During a Call Dial Tones: Available on some phones.
Features
419
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Features
Models with Display Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
HFL Buttons
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Buttons (home) Button Left Selector Wheel
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be ON.
2 Phone Setup P. 425
Microphone
(Back) Button (Talk) Button
(Hang-up) Button (Pick-up) Button
Voice control tips
· Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphones.
· Press the button when you want to call a
number using a phonebook name or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
· If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
· To change the volume level, select the audio
system's VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
If there is no Favorite Contact entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears on the screen.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 430
420
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone menu on the driver information interface, or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call. (Back) button: Press to go back to the previous screen, or cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal. Left Selector Wheel: Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select Phone on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel. (home) button: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface.
To go to the phone screen of the driver information interface: 1. Press the (home) button on the steering wheel. 2. Select Phone.
u You can select Favorite Contacts or Recent Calls.
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
Features
Continued
421
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
HFL Mode
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength Battery Level Status
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.
Caller's Name (If registered)/ Caller's Number (If not registered)
Limitations for Manual Operation*
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored phonebook names or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 430
Features
422 * Not available on all models
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
Phone settings screen
1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Settings.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1HFL Menus To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked. Some functions are limited while driving.
Features
Change Devices
+ Connect New Device Pair a new phone to the system. (Existing entry list) Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.
Auto Sync Phone
Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
Auto Phone Call Transfer Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
Ringtone
Select a fixed ring tone or the one from the connected cell phone.
HondaLink Assist*
Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off.
* Not available on all models
Continued
423
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Phone menu screen
1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone.
Features
Recent Calls
All Dialed Missed Received
Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls. Display the last outgoing calls. Display the last missed calls. Display the last incoming calls.
Favorite Contacts
(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Contacts
Display the phonebook of the paired phone.
Keypad
Enter a phone number to dial.
424
Phone Setup
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Bluetooth® setup You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off. 1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select Options. 6. Select Bluetooth, then ON.
Features
Continued
425
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Connect Phone. 4. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select + Connect New Device. u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device. 5. Select your phone when it appears on the
list. u If your phone still does not appear,
search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, search for HandsFreeLink. 6. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone. 7. Select desired functions and then select Save.
1Phone Setup Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive handsfree calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
· You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
· Up to six phones can be paired. · Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or more icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio. : The phone can be used with HFL.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay pairing of additional Bluetooth compatible devices is unavailable.
Features
426
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To change the currently paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 423
2. Select Change Devices. 3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.
4. Select or . 5. Select Save.
To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 423
2. Select Change Devices. 3. Select a phone you want to delete.
1To change the currently paired phone If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device from the Bluetooth screen.
Features
4. Select Delete. 5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
Continued
427
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 423
2. Select Ringtone. 3. Select Vehicle or Phone.
1Ring Tone
Vehicle: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.
Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 423
2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer. 3. Select ON or OFF.
Features
428
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When Auto Sync Phone is set to On: When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History On some phones, it is necessary to set up it enabled to be imported the cellular phonebook.
When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
Mobile
Work
Changing the Auto Sync Phone setting 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 423
2. Select Auto Sync Phone. 3. Select ON or OFF.
Home Pager Car Pref
Other Fax Voice
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Features
Continued
429
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Favorite Contacts
Recent Calls Screen
Star Icon Contacts Screen
To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 424
2. Select the Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad screen.
3. Select the star icon. u A notification appears on the screen if the Favorite Contact is successfully stored. u To remove the Favorite Contact, select the star icon again.
Keypad Screen
Star Icon
Features
Star Icon
430
To edit a Favorite Contact 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 424
2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you
want to edit. 4. Select a setting you want. 5. Select Save.
To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 424
2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you
want to delete. 4. Select Remove. 5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Continued
431
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, or Favorite Contact entries.
1Making a Call Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple CarPlay.
Features
432
To make a call using the imported phonebook
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 424
2. Select Contacts. 3. Select a name.
u You can sort by First Name or Last Name. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.
4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 424
2. Select Keypad. 3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers.
4. Select Call. u Dialing starts automatically.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Continued
433
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received. 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 424
2. Select Recent Calls. u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.
3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is connected to the system.
To make a call using a Favorite Contact entry
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 424
2. Select Favorite Contacts. u You can change the order of Favorite Contact entries by selecting Reorder.
3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.
Features
434
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call... screen appears.
Press the Press the call.
button to answer the call. button to decline or end the
1Receiving a Call Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons.
Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
Mute Icon
The available options are shown on the lower half of the screen.
1Options During a Call
You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.
Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Continued
435
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To Set Up Text Message Options
To turn on or off the text message notice
1. Press the button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Pop-up Notification. 5. Select ON or OFF.
1To Set Up Text Message Options To use the text message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone.
1To turn on or off the text message notice ON: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. OFF: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.
Features
436
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Receiving a Text Message
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as the last 20 messages received on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. Select the system status icon. u The status area appears.
2. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message.
3. Select Open to display the message. u The text message is displayed.
4. Select Play to listen to the message. To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop.
1Receiving a Text Message Some cell phones might not be able to read the transmission log of data sent and data received.
The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.
The system can only receive messages that are sent a text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 of the last text messages received.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message feature. Only use the text message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.
Features
Continued
437
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Selecting a Phone
You can select one from the Bluetooth® device list to be active and receive notifications.
1. Press the button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Change Connected Phone. 5. Change a desired phone.
2 To change the currently paired phone P. 427
1Selecting a Phone
You can only receive notifications from one phone at a time.
Features
438
Displaying Messages
Message List
1. Press the button. 2. Select Messages.
u Select a phone if necessary. 3. Select a message.
u The text message is displayed.
Text Message
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1Displaying Messages The (blue) icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message will also be deleted from the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phone's outbox.
To see the previous or next message, select Prev or Next on the message screen.
Features
Continued
439
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Read or Stop reading a message 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Play.
u The system starts reading the message aloud.
3. Select Stop to stop reading. Select Play again to start reading the message.
Reply to a message 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Reply. 3. Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 4. Select Send to send the message.
u Message sent. appears on the screen when the reply message was successfully sent.
1Reply to a message
The available reply messages are as follows:
· Talk to you later, I'm driving. · I'm on my way. · I'm running late. · OK · Yes · No
The default reply messages are displayed only in English. If you want to use reply messages in languages other than English, please edit them.
2 To edit a reply message P. 441
You can add a reply message by selecting + Create New Message.
2 To edit a reply message P. 441
Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
440
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To edit a reply message 1. Press the button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Edit Replies. 5. Select the reply message you want to edit
or + Create New Message. u The on-screen keyboard screen is
displayed. 6. Enter a reply message, and then select
Save.
1To edit a reply message
You can change the order of reply messages by selecting Reorder.
To delete a reply message 1. Press the button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Delete Replies. 5. Select on the reply message you want to
delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 6. Select Yes.
Features
Continued
441
Features
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Call.
442
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist*
Features
HondaLink® Assist*
In Case of Emergency
Automatic collision notification If your vehicle's airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink® operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.
IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink® Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink® Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.
*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle's location may not be sent to the operator.
1HondaLink® Assist* HondaLink® Assist also provides services you can operate from the Internet or your smartphone.
To subscribe to HondaLink® Assist, or to get more information about all of its features, contact an Honda dealer, or visit hondalink.honda.com
1In Case of Emergency Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.
You cannot use this emergency services when:
· You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage
areas.
· There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.
· HondaLink Assist is not enabled.
2 To enable notification P. 444
You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Only the operator can terminate the connection to your vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
* Not available on all models
Continued
443
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist*
To enable notification
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 423
2. Select HondaLink Assist. 3. Select Enable or Cancel.
1To enable notification
Setting options:
· Enable: Notification is available. · Cancel: Disable the feature.
Features
444
Refuel Recommend
Models with navigation system
Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that recommends refueling at a timing of your preference. Once the system is programmed, this feature will notify you when refueling is recommended as well as enable you to search for gas stations that are located in the vicinity of your vehicle.
1. When it is time to refuel the vehicle, a notification is displayed and a notification icon is displayed in the header.
2. Touch the box that contains the icon.
1Refuel Recommend You can change the setting for Refuel Recommend by selecting: SettingsSystemRefuel recommend
When you turn off this feature, the timing that you programmed for refueling will be deleted.
This feature can only be used when the gas tank fuel level is below 30 percent.
Notification icon
3. Select Find Gas Station Now.
If you select Find Gas Station Now or put more than 5 liters of gasoline into the gas tank, the notification for refueling will disappear. If you prefer not to be notified, select OFF in the settings for Refuel Recommend.
When you drive on a rough road or ascend or descend a hill for an extended period of time, the notification may disappear or may not be displayed at all.
Features
4. Choose a gas station from the search screen of the navigation system. u For instructions on how to use the navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.
445
446
Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.
Before Driving................................... 448 Towing a Trailer................................ 453 When Driving
Turning on the Power ...................... 454 Precautions While Driving................. 460 Transmission .................................... 462 Shifting ............................................ 463 SPORT Mode.................................... 469 Deceleration Paddle Selector ............ 470 ECON Mode .................................... 473 Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System...... 474 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System ...............475
* Not available on all models
Agile Handling Assist ............................. 477 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .. 478 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ......... 481 Blind spot information System*........ 483 High Voltage Battery........................ 486 Honda Sensing® ................................ 487 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) ....................................... 490 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow ................................. 499 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).... 517
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ........................................ 525 Traffic Sign Recognition System ....... 530 Front Sensor Camera ....................... 536 Radar Sensor ................................... 538 Braking Brake System ................................... 539 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 547 Brake Assist System ......................... 548 Parking Your Vehicle........................ 549 Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 554 Refueling........................................... 557 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions.... 560
447
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
Exterior Checks
· Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components.
· Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
· Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 592
· Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.
Driving
448
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Interior Checks
· Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 451
· Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.
· Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving.
· If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
· Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 182
· Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 214 2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions P. 219
· Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 212 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 211
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
Driving
Continued
449
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
· Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
· Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 49
· Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 84
450
Driving
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
Label Example
1Maximum Load Limit
3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
2 Specifications P. 662
Driving
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 662
Continued
451
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
1Maximum Load Limit
Towing a Trailer: See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.
2 Towing a Trailer P. 453
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver's doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1
Example2
Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight 550 lbs (249 kg)
Driving
452
Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight 100 lbs (45 kg)
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 657
453
Driving
When Driving
Turning on the Power
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The parking brake indicator (red) comes on for 30 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.
1Turning on the Power Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the power system.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).
Electric Parking Brake Switch
2. Depress the brake pedal.
When turning on the power system in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce 12-volt battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
Brake Pedal
If exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the power system does not activate.
2 Immobilizer System P. 189
When you turn the power system on, you may feel the brake pedal slightly sink down. This is normal.
Driving
454
uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power
3. Without depressing the accelerator pedal, press the POWER button while depressing the brake pedal.
4. Check the READY indicator. u Keep depressing the brake pedal until the READY indicator comes on. u The READY indicator comes on when the power system is on and you can start driving. u If the outside temperature is extremely low, you cannot drive until conditions are improved. In this case, the READY indicator does not come on and a warning message appears on the driver information interface.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 107
Stopping the Power System
You can turn the power system off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1Turning on the Power Bring the remote close to the POWER button if the battery in the remote is weak. 2 If the Remote Battery is Weak P. 636
The power system may not activate if the remote is subjected to strong radio waves.
The engine may not run when the vehicle is ready for driving. You can start driving with the READY indicator on. If you press the POWER button while depressing the brake pedal with the READY indicator on, the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF and you cannot start driving.
2 READY Indicator P. 90
Do not hold the POWER button to start the power system. If the power system does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before trying again.
1. Put the transmission into (P. 2. Press the POWER button.
Driving
Continued
455
uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power
Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback*
You can remotely turn the power system on using the button on the remote.
To turn the power system on
Press the
button, then press and hold
the button.
Some exterior lights flash once.
Go within the range, and try again.
LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.
1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback*
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation.
Some exterior lights flash six times if the power system turns on successfully.
Some exterior lights will not flash if the power system turns on unsuccessfully.
The power system is on for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle. To extend the time for another 10 minutes during the first 10 minutes, press the
button, then press and hold the button. u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was
transmitted successfully.
The remote engine start may violate local laws. Before using the remote engine start, check your local laws.
If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference. The power system may not be turned on by the remote engine start if:
· You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the audio/information screen.
· The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF. · The transmission is in a position other than (P. · The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.
Driving
456 * Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power
To turn the power system off
Go within the range, and try again.
The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of the smart entry system range. The power system will not be turned off.
Press and hold the button for one second.
The exterior lights flash once if the power system turned off successfully.
1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback*
· You have already used the remote twice to turn the
power system on.
· Another registered remote is in the vehicle. · There is any antenna failure. · The door is unlocked with the built-in key. · The engine oil pressure is low. · The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. · The telematics unit* malfunctions. · The security system alarm is not set.
The power system may be turned off while it is running if:
· You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
turning the power system on with the remote.
· The power system is turned off by using the
remote.
· The security system alarm is activated. · The door is unlocked with the built-in key. · The hood is open. · The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. · The 12-volt battery is low. · The engine oil pressure is low. · The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on if
there is a problem with the emissions control systems.
· You press the POWER button without depressing
the brake pedal.
· The transmission is in a position other than (P.
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
457
uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power
1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback*
While the power system is on, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside:
· The climate control system is activated in auto
mode. When it is cold outside:
· The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
· The rear defogger and door mirror heaters are
activated.
· The seat heaters* are activated.
2 Front Seat Heaters* P. 230
Driving
458 * Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power
Starting to Drive
When the power system is turned on using the button on the remote
1. Depress the brake pedal and press the POWER button simultaneously.
When the power system is turned on in any case
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, check that the READY indicator is on, then press the (D button. Select (R when reversing.
3. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal. u Make sure the parking brake indicator (red) goes off.
2 Parking Brake P. 539 2 If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning
Message P. 650
1Starting to Drive
When the power system is turned on using the button on the remote
The power system is off when the transmission position is changed from (P before the POWER button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.
You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal.
Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Put the transmission into (D when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
As a hybrid vehicle, the sounds and vibrations from the engine may be absent even though the vehicle is ready for driving. It also makes you fail to recognize that you can start. Make sure to check if the READY indicator is on before you start to drive.
1Hill start assist system Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.
Driving
459
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Precautions While Driving
In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the power system or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE Do not change the transmission while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.
NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the power system will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the transmission into (N, as you will lose regenerative braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the power system or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced.
Driving
460
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
1Precautions While Driving NOTICE The following can damage the under spoiler:
· Parking the vehicle by a parking block · Parallel parking along the road shoulder · Driving towards the bottom of a hill · Driving up or down to a different surface level
(such as a road shoulder)
· Driving on a rutted or bumpy road · Driving on a road with potholes
461
Driving
uuWhen DrivinguTransmission
Transmission
Creeping
As with a conventional gasoline-powered vehicle with an automatic transmission, this vehicle will creep. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Kickdown
The accelerator pedal is equipped with a kickdown switch. When you depress the accelerator pedal to the point at which the switch is activated, the vehicle will suddenly accelerate with greater power, similar to what happens in a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission.
462
Driving
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
Shift button positions
Park Used when parking, before turning off or starting the power system Transmission is locked
Reverse Used when reversing Neutral Transmission is not locked
Drive Used for: Normal driving The deceleration paddle selector can be used
temporarily. The deceleration paddle selector can be used when SPORT mode is on.
1Shifting
3 WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift position indicator.
While the High Voltage battery level is full, or the High Voltage battery temperature is low, regenerative braking may become less effective.
To prevent malfunction and unintended engagement:
· Do not spill any liquids on or around shift buttons. · Do not place or drop any objects on or around shift
buttons.
· Do not let passengers or children operate the shift
buttons.
You may occasionally find that it takes longer than usual for the vehicle to start moving when you select (R, release the brake pedal, and/or depress the accelerator pedal. This may occur when the High Voltage battery level is extremely low, and does not indicate a vehicle malfunction.
Continued
Driving
463
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
(P (parking) button
(P Button
The shift position changes to (P when you press the (P button while the vehicle is parked with the power mode in ON. The indicators on the sides of the (P button come on.
1Shifting
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when you depress the accelerator pedal with the transmission in (N.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 107
Put the transmission into (D or (R with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you are in the correct gear before driving.
Driving
464
Shift Operation
Shift Position Indicator Deceleration Paddle Selector Indicator
Press the (P button. Pull back the (R button. Press the (N button. Press the (D button.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
1Shift Operation NOTICE When you change (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift button before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift position indicator and the shift button indicator to check the shift position before selecting a shift button.
If the indicator of the currently selected shift position, or all the shift position indicators are blinking simultaneously, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The beeper sounds once when you change to (R. 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
Driving
Shift Button Indicator
* Not available on all models
Continued
465
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
When opening the driver's door If you open the driver's door under the following conditions, the shift position automatically changes to (P; · The vehicle is stationary with the power mode in ON, or moving at 1 mph (2 km/h)
or slower. · The transmission is other than (P. · You have unfastened the driver side seat belt.
u If you manually put the transmission from (P with the brake pedal depressed, the transmission will automatically return to (P once you release the brake pedal.
When turning off the power mode If you turn the power system off while the vehicle is stationary, and the transmission is in other than (P, the shift position automatically changes to (P.
1When opening the driver's door While the system is designed to automatically change the shift position to (P under the described conditions, in the interest of safety you should always select (P before opening the driver's door. Make sure to park the vehicle in a safe place. 2 When Stopped P. 549
If you want to drive the vehicle after the shift position has automatically changed to (P under the described conditions, close the door, fasten the seat belt, depress the brake pedal, then change the shift position.
If you leave the vehicle, turn off the power system and lock the doors.
Driving
466
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] With the power system on: 1. Press and hold the brake pedal. 2. Press and release the (N button.
u (N (Neutral) hold mode will appear on the driver information interface. 3. Press the (N button again and hold it for two seconds.
u The vehicle will enter car wash mode, which must be used when your vehicle is pulled through a conveyor type automatic car wash where you or an attendant do not remain in the vehicle.
If the POWER button is pressed after car wash mode has been activated, the power mode will change to ACCESSORY and a message will be displayed on the driver information interface.
u For 15 minutes the transmission remains in (N with the power mode will remain in ACCESSORY. After that, the transmission automatically changes to (P and the power mode changes to OFF.
u Manually changing to (P cancels ACCESSORY mode. The (P indicator comes on and the power mode changes to OFF. You must always put the transmission into (P when car wash mode is no longer needed.
1If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode]
To keep the vehicle in (N position, you can also follow this procedure: While the power mode is on, select (N, and then within five seconds, press the POWER button.
Note that the transmission may not stay in (N position while any of the following indicators is on:
· Transmission system indicator. · Malfunction indicator lamp. · Charging system indicator.
Driving
Continued
467
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Restrictions on selecting a shift position You cannot select a shift position under certain circumstances that may lead to a crash.
When the transmission 1. Under these
is in:
circumstances:
2. If you try to change to 3. The transmission
How to change
the following:
remains in/changes to: the transmission
(P
(N
(N or (D (R or (N (R, (N or (D
The brake pedal is not depressed.
The accelerator pedal is depressed.
The vehicle is moving at low speed without the brake pedal depressed.
The vehicle is moving at low speed with the accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle is moving forward.
The vehicle is moving backward.
The vehicle is moving.
Other transmission
(R (D (P
(P
Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.
(N Stop your vehicle in a safe place, depress the brake pedal, and select the appropriate transmission.
(P or (N
The READY indicator is not A shift position other than
on.
(P or (N
(P or (N
Make sure that the READY indicator comes on.
Driving
468
SPORT Mode
SPORT Mode Indicator
uuWhen DrivinguSPORT Mode
Driving
SPORT Button
To turn the SPORT mode on and off, press the SPORT button. The SPORT mode increases engine performance. This mode is not recommended for fuel economy enhancement, but suitable for driving on hills or through curves on mountain roads. The SPORT mode is turned off every time you start the power system, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.
469
uuWhen DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector
Deceleration Paddle Selector
When you release the accelerator pedal, you can control the rate of deceleration
without releasing your hands from the steering wheel. Using the deceleration
paddle selector situated on the steering wheel, you can sequentially shift through
three stages of deceleration.
When descending a hill, you can use the deceleration paddle selector to help
maintain the rate of deceleration, thereby allowing you to keep a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Decrease
The default deceleration stage is . Each paddle selector operation makes a single
Deceleration Stage
stage deceleration change. u The deceleration stage may not change if you pull the paddle selector continuously.
Increase
1Deceleration Paddle Selector
3 CAUTION
Rapidly increasing the deceleration rate by quickly shifting the deceleration paddle selector can cause the tires to skid, resulting in a crash that could injure or kill someone.
Always maintain a reasonable rate of deceleration.
If you are descending a hill when you select stage , the vehicle may enter stage .
If you pull back right and left paddle selector at the same time, the deceleration stage may not change.
To select the different stages of deceleration: · Pull back the (+ selector (right side) to decrease the deceleration stage. · Pull back the (- selector (left side) to increase the deceleration stage. Pull the (+ selector for a few seconds when you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector.
Driving
470
uuWhen DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector
When to use
Shift position is in (D
When SPORT mode is OFF, the deceleration stage appears.
Deceleration Stage
When SPORT mode is ON, the deceleration stage and M appear.
1Deceleration Paddle Selector
In the following situations, the stage may not change and the stage icon will blink even if you pull back the selector. The deceleration stage may decrease or cancel automatically:
· The high voltage battery is fully charged or its
temperature is too cold or too hot.
· The speed of the vehicle is beyond the deceleration
range with SPORT mode off.
· Hybrid system protection is needed. · The paddle selector is operated while your vehicle is
stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
If either paddle selector is operated, ACC with Low Speed Follow will cancel automatically.
Driving
Increase the deceleration stage when pulling the (paddle selector (left side)
Paddle Selector
Decrease the deceleration stage when pulling the (+ paddle selector (right side)
Continued
471
uuWhen DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector
When SPORT mode is OFF If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change temporarily, and the stage will appear in the driver information interface. When you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector, pull the (+ selector (right side) for a few seconds. The deceleration paddle selector will cancel automatically and deceleration stage in the driver information interface disappear when you drive with constant speed, situations of acceleration and decelerate just before stopping your vehicle. When SPORT mode is ON If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change and the stage along with M will appear in the driver information interface. The deceleration stage is not cancel automatically while SPORT mode is ON. When you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector, turn the SPORT mode OFF, or pull the (+ selector (right side) for a few seconds. When canceled, deceleration stage in the driver information interface disappear.
472
Driving
ECON Mode
uuWhen DrivinguECON Mode
1ECON Mode While in ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuations. Due to emergency brakes operation or driving conditions, you may not be able to change the mode.
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the climate control system and the accelerator pedal response.
Driving
473
uuWhen DrivinguAcoustic Vehicle Alerting System
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System
Alerts pedestrians when the vehicle transmission is in a position other than (P and is traveling at speeds of 22 mph (36 km/h) or less.
474
Driving
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine and motor output and selectively applying the brakes.
VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine and motor does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic brake system. You will also see the indicator blink.
VSA® System Indicator
1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.
The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a 12-volt battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving
Continued
475
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator
This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA® functionality/features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
Your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but traction control function will be less effective.
To restore VSA® functionality/features, press the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you turn the power system on, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.
When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after turning the power system on or while driving. This is normal.
Driving
476
uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist
Agile Handling Assist
Lightly brakes the front wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle's stability and performance during cornering.
1Agile Handling Assist
The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate.
You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal.
Driving
477
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated.
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on and a message to appear
on the driver information interface.
TPMS Calibration
You must start TPMS calibration every time you: · Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. · Rotate the tires. · Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS: · Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 592
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
· Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
· Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 592
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when:
· You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
· You drive on snowy or slippery roads. · Tire chains are used.
Make sure: · The vehicle is at a complete stop. · The transmission is in (P. · The power mode is in ON.
Driving
478
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Models without Display Audio
You can calibrate the system from the customized features on the driver information interface. 1. Roll the left selector wheel controls to select
Vehicle Settings, then push the left selector wheel. u TPMS Calibration appears on the
display. 2. Push the left selector wheel.
u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select Cancel or Calibrate.
3. Roll the left selector wheel controls to select Calibrate, then push the left selector wheel. u Calibration Started screen appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen.
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions:
· A compact spare tire* is used. · There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
than the condition at calibration.
· Tire chains are used.
1TPMS Calibration
· TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire*
is installed.
· The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
· During this period, if the power mode is set to ON
and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete.
· If the Calibration Failed to Start message appears, repeat steps 23.
· The calibration process finishes automatically.
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
479
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Models with Display Audio
You can calibrate the system from the customized feature on the audio/information screen.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 268
1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the button. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Vehicle. 5. Select TPMS Calibration. 6. Select Calibrate.
· If the Calibration Failed To Start. message appears, repeat steps 5-6.
· The calibration process finishes automatically.
1TPMS Calibration If the tire chains are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details.
The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a 12-volt battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving
480
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Driving
Continued
481
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
482
Driving
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System*
Blind spot information System*
Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle, particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as "blind spots."
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you change lanes.
How the system works
The transmission is in (D. Your vehicle speed is between 20 mph
(32 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h)
Alert zone range A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) B: Approx. 9.5 ft. (2.9 m) C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Radar Sensors:
underneath the
rear bumper
A
corners
B
Alert Zone
C
1Blind spot information System*
3 WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death. Do not rely only on the blind spot information system when changing lanes.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.
Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, blind spot information system has limitations. Over reliance on blind spot information system may result in a collision.
The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions:
· A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more
than two seconds.
· A vehicle is parked in a side lane. · The speed difference between your vehicle and the
vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h).
· An object not detected by the radar sensors
approaches or passes your vehicle.
· A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a
motorcycle or other small vehicle.
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
483
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System*
When the system detects a vehicle Blind spot information System Alert Indicator:
Comes On
Located on the outside rearview mirror on both sides.
Blinks
Comes on when: · A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind
to overtake you with a speed difference of no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your vehicle. · You pass a vehicle with a speed difference of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Blinks and a beeper sounds when: You move the turn signal lever in the direction of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds three times.
1Blind spot information System*
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur.
· The blind spot information system alert indicator
may not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind Spot Information System Not Available driver information interface appearing.
· The blind spot information system alert indicator
may come on even with the message appearing.
You can change the setting for the blind spot information system.
2 Customized Features P. 372
Blind spot information system may be adversely affected when:
· Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc,.) are
detected.
· An object that does not reflect radio waves well,
such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
· Driving on a curved road. · A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent
lane.
· The system picks up external electrical interference. · The rear bumper or the sensors have been
improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
· The orientation of the sensors has been changed. · In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).
Driving
484 * Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System*
Blind spot information System On and Off When you turn the blind spot information system on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch. 2. Roll the left selector wheel to the symbol and push it.
Left Selector Wheel Safety Support Switch
The blind spot information system is in the previously selected ON or OFF setting each time you start the engine.
1Blind spot information System*
For a proper blind spot information system operation:
· Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. · Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
labels or stickers of any kind.
· Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear
bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired, or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted.
Driving
* Not available on all models
485
uuWhen DrivinguHigh Voltage Battery
High Voltage Battery
The High Voltage battery gradually discharges even if the vehicle is not in use. As a result, if your vehicle is parked for an extended period of time, the battery charge level will become low. Extended periods of time at a low state of charge will shorten battery life. To maintain the battery state of charge, drive your vehicle for more than 30 minutes at least once every three months. Extreme high temperatures can affect the battery life. You can minimize the effects by parking the vehicle in the shade during the summer.
1High Voltage Battery
Be careful not to let the High Voltage battery drain too much. If the battery level becomes close to zero, it will make it impossible to start the power system.
Driving
486
Honda Sensing®
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located in the front lower grille and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
Honda Sensing® has following functions.
The functions which do not require switch operations to activate · Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 2 P. 490 · Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 2 P. 525 · Traffic Sign Recognition System 2 P. 530
The functions which require switch operations to activate · Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow 2 P. 499 · Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 517
Driving
Continued
487
uuHonda Sensing®u
Operation Switches for the ACC with Low Speed Follow/ LKAS
MAIN button CANCEL button MAIN Button Press to activate standby mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow and LKAS. Or press to
cancel these systems.
LKAS Button Press to activate or cancel the LKAS.
Interval Button RES/+ Button
LKAS Button
RES/+/SET/- Button Press RES/+ to resume the ACC with Low Speed Follow or increase the vehicle speed. Press SET/- to set the ACC with Low Speed Follow or decrease the vehicle speed.
SET/- Button
Interval Button Press the (interval) button to change the ACC with Low Speed Follow followinginterval.
CANCEL Button Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow.
Driving
488
Driver Information Interface Content
You can see the current state of ACC with Low Speed Follow and LKAS.
a Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow and LKAS are ready to be activated.
b Indicates that LKAS is activated and whether or not traffic lane lines are detected.
c Indicates whether or not ACC with Low Speed Follow detected the vehicle ahead.
d Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow shows the set vehicle speed.
e Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow shows the set vehicle interval.
uuHonda Sensing®u
489
Driving
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable. How the system works
When to use
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent a collision nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.
The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 494
Driving
The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
The CMBSTM activates when: The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in
front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision. Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines
there is a chance of a collision with: - Vehicles detected in front of you that are stationary, oncoming, or traveling in your same direction. - A pedestrian who is detected in front of you. Your vehicle speed is above 62 mph (100 km/h), and the system determines there
is a chance of a collision with a vehicle detected in front of you traveling in your same direction.
490
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.
2 Radar Sensor P. 538
When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined.
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
When the system activates
The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.). Visual Alerts
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 494
Audible Alert
Beep
At system's earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/ Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through driver information interface or audio/information screen setting options.
2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
491
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.
Distance between vehicles The radar sensor detects a vehicle
CMBSTM Audible & Visual WARNINGS
Braking
Normal
Vehicle
When in Long, visual and audible alerts come
Stage one
Long Short
Ahead There is a risk of a collision with the on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead
vehicle ahead of you.
than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a
--
Your Vehicle
shorter distance than in Normal.
Stage two
Your Vehicle
Vehicle Ahead
The risk of a collision has increased,
time to respond is reduced.
Stage three
Your Vehicle
Vehicle Ahead
The CMBSTM determines that a
collision is unavoidable.
Visual and audible alerts.
Lightly applied
Forcefully applied
Driving
492
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
CMBSTM On and Off
Left Selector Wheel
Safety Support Switch
When you turn the CMBSTM on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch. 2. Roll the left selector wheel to the
symbol and push it. u The message appears on the driver
information interface when the system becomes on or off.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the power system, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the safety support indicator (amber) will come and stay on under certain conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 494
When the CMBSTM is activated, it will continue to operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially depressed. However, it will be canceled if the accelerator pedal is deeply depressed.
The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after re-connecting the 12-volt battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving
Continued
493
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).
Environmental conditions · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. · There is little contrast between objects and the background. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. · Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians. · Reflections on the interior of the windshield. · Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
pedestrians or other vehicles may not be detected).
Roadway conditions · Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). · Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads. · The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving
494
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Vehicle conditions
· Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. · The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. · The inside of the windshield is fogged. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire*, etc.). · When tire chains are installed. · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. · The camera temperature gets too high. · Driving with the parking brake applied. · When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty. · Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
Detection limitations
· A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. · The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short. · A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. · When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed. · The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle. · When there are animals in front of your vehicle. · When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. · The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large. · An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. · Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc. · Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. · When driving through a narrow iron bridge. · When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
495
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only
· When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side.
· Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian's shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
· When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
· When a pedestrian blends in with the background. · When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running. · When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group. · When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Automatic shutoff The CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on when: · The temperature inside the system is high. · You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period. · An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.). · The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
Once the conditions that caused the CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.
496
Driving
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
With Little Chance of a Collision
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:
1With Little Chance of a Collision
Do not paint, or apply any coverings or paint to radar sensor area. This can impact CMBSTM operation.
When Passing Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
At an intersection Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
Driving
Continued
497
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
On a curve When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.
Through a low bridge at high speed You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed. Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc. You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects (such as a traffic sign and guard rail) on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls.
498
Driving
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator. When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle's brake lights will illuminate.
When to use
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
3 WARNING
Improper use of ACC with Low Speed Follow can lead to a crash.
Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good weather conditions.
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
3 WARNING
ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited braking capability and may not stop your vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.
The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.
Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with Low Speed Follow range ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h). No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.
Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D.
Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal if the conditions require.
Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.
For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.
2 Radar Sensor P. 538
Driving
Continued
499
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
How to activate the system
How to use
ACC (green) is on in the instrument panel. ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.
Press the MAIN button on the steering wheel.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC with Low Speed Follow and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are either turned on or off.
ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 506
When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the following conditions:
· On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
· On roads with sharp turns. · On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC with Low Speed Follow will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.
· On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
Driving
500
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Set the Vehicle Speed
SET/- button
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen between mph and km/h.
2 Speed Unit P. 135 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
On when ACC with Low Speed Follow begins
Press and release
When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal and press the SET/ button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low Speed Follow begins. When driving slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the button fixes the set speed to about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.
The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after re-connecting the 12-volt battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
501
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Set Vehicle Interval Set Vehicle Speed
When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars and set speed appear on the driver information interface.
When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated. By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.
Driving
502
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
When in Operation
There is a vehicle ahead ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicle's set speed in order to keep the vehicle's set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 510
1When in Operation
If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, the beeper sounds, a message appears on the driver information interface.
Driving
ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle icon appears on the driver information interface.
Beep
Continued
503
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
There is no vehicle ahead
A vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the driver information interface.
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.
When you depress the accelerator pedal You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.
1When in Operation
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:
· The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
· A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
2 Speed Unit P. 135 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
Limitations You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow. Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 506
Driving
504 * Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and slows to a stop Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The Stopped message appears on the driver information interface. When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, the vehicle icon on the driver information interface blinks. If you press the RES/+ or SET/ button, or depress the accelerator pedal, ACC with Low Speed Follow operates again within the prior set speed.
If no vehicle is ahead of you before you resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal and ACC with Low Speed Follow will operate again within the prior set speed.
1A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and slows to a stop
3 WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped while the ACC with Low Speed Follow system is operating can result in the vehicle moving without operator control.
A vehicle that moves without operator control can cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.
Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
Driving
Continued
505
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC with Low Speed Follow indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC with Low Speed Follow functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
1ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations
The radar sensor for ACC with Low Speed Follow is shared with the collision mitigation braking system (CMBS).
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 490
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).
Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Vehicle conditions · The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire*, etc.). · The camera temperature gets too high. · The parking brake is applied. · When the radar sensor cover is dirty. · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. · When tire chains are installed.
Driving
506 * Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Detection limitations · A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you. · The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short. · A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. · When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high
speed. · The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle. · When there are animals in front of your vehicle. · When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
Driving
· The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is significantly large.
· An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. · Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
Continued
507
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
· When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
· When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly. · When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
Radar detects upper section of an empty carrier truck.
Panel truck, tanker truck, etc.
Driving
· When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane. 508
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or SET/ button on the steering wheel.
To increase speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then push and release the SET/ button, the current speed of the vehicle is set.
To decrease speed
· Each time you press the RES/+ or SET/ button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
· If you press and hold the RES/+ or SET/ button, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen between mph and km/h.
2 Speed Unit P. 135 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
509
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Set or Change Following-interval
Interval Button
Press the (Interval) button to change the ACC with Low Speed Follow followinginterval. Each time you press the button, the followinginterval (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through extra long, long, middle, and short followingintervals.
Determine the most appropriate followinginterval setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements set by local regulation.
Driving
510
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
The higher your vehicle's following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.
Following-interval
When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h)
65 mph (104 km/h)
Short
81.0 feet 24.7 meters
1.1 sec
103.3 feet 31.5 meters
1.1 sec
Middle
112.2 feet 34.2 meters
1.5 sec
142.4 feet 43.4 meters
1.5 sec
Long
153.5 feet 46.8 meters
2.1 sec
199.4 feet 60.8 meters
2.1 sec
Extra Long
208.3 feet 63.5 meters
2.9 sec
273.6 feet 83.4 meters
2.9 sec
When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low Speed Follow interval setting.
Driving
Continued
511
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Cancel
MAIN Button
CANCEL Button
To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any of the following: · Press the CANCEL button. · Press the MAIN button.
u The ACC with Low Speed Follow indicator (green) goes off.
· Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is moving forward.
1To Cancel Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.
Driving
512
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Automatic cancellation The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel: · Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) · When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty. · The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. · An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. · Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. · Abrupt steering wheel movement. · When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated. · When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on. · When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope. · When you manually apply the parking brake. · When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too
close to your vehicle. · The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty. · When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded. · When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel.
1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC with Low Speed Follow to cancel improves, then press the SET/ button.
Driving
Continued
513
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
In the following cases, a buzzer sounds, ACC with Low Speed Follow is deactivated, and the Cruise Cancelled: Slope Too Steep. Watch Downhill Speed message appears in the driver information interface. · While descending a long slope and the vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes
to maintain the set speed. The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied. · The driver's seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary. · The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes. · The power system is turned off.
514
Driving
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
ACC with Low Speed Follow ON
Cruise Control ON
Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise. To switch back to ACC with Low Speed Follow, press and hold the button again for one second.
1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following interval from a vehicle ahead of you.
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen between mph and km/h.
2 Speed Unit P. 135 2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
When to use Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.
To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the SET/ button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the SET/ button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated. By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
515
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Each time you press the RES/+ or SET/ button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). If you keep the RES/+ or SET/ button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: · Press the CANCEL button. · Press the MAIN button. · Depress the brake pedal. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
1To Cancel Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
· When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) · When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.
Driving
516
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
Steering input assist The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.
Front Sensor Camera
Monitors the lane lines.
Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a substitute for your vehicle control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 107
Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off.
If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 522
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
Driving
Continued
517
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Lane Keep Support Function
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.
Driving
Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
Warning Area
Warning Area
518
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met. · The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane. · The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). · You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. · The turn signals are off. · The brake pedal is not depressed. · The wipers are not in continuous operation.
1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
How to activate the system
MAIN Button
1. Press the MAIN button. u The LKAS is on in the driver information interface. The system is ready to use.
LKAS Button
2. Press the LKAS button. u Lane outlines appear on the driver information interface. The system is activated.
Driving
Continued
519
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The dotted outer lines change to solid ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.
To Cancel
MAIN Button LKAS Button
To cancel the LKAS: Press the MAIN or LKAS button.
1To Cancel
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC with Low Speed Follow on and off.
The LKAS is turned off every time you turn the power system off, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.
Driving
520
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the driver information interface change to contour lines, and the beeper sounds (if activated).
The system operation is suspended if you:
· The wipers are set to HI. u Turning the wipers off resumes the LKAS.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
· Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the wipers operate at high speed. u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop or operate at low speed.
All models
· Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.
· Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal.
The LKAS may automatically be suspended when: · The system fails to detect lane lines. · The steering wheel is quickly turned. · You fail to steer the vehicle. · Driving through a sharp curve. · Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h). Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
Driving
Continued
521
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
The LKAS may automatically be canceled when: · The camera temperature gets extremely high or low. · The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty. · The ABS or VSA® system engages. The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following: Environmental conditions · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. · There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. · Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. · Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. · Reflections on the interior of the windshield. · Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
522
Driving
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Roadway conditions · Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). · Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. · Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
Faded lines
Duplicate lines
Tire tracks
· The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
· The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
Very wide or narrow traffic lane
Driving
· The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. · The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. · Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
Continued
523
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
· When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).
· Driving on roads with double lines.
Lane void of lines at junction
Vehicle conditions · Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. · The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc. · The inside of the windshield is fogged. · The camera temperature gets too high. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire*, etc.). · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
524 * Not available on all models
Driving
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.
How the System Works
The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane.
2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the driver information interface.
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations. Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 536
The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 528
Driving
If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane markings are solid continuous lines. The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.
There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.
In the following case, a beeper sounds, a message related to the ACC with Low Speed Follow appears on the driver information interface, and the braking function controlled by the RDM system is canceled.
· The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to
maintain the set speed (for example, you are descending a long slope).
* Not available on all models
Continued
525
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
How the System Activates
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the following conditions are met: · The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). · The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. · The turn signals are off. · The brake pedal is not depressed. · The wipers are not in continuous operation. · The vehicle is not accelerating or braking, and the steering wheel is not being
turned. · The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
If LKAS is off and you have selected Narrow from the customized options using the driver information interface or audio/information screen, the message below will appear in case the system determines a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings.
2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
Driving
526 * Not available on all models
1How the System Activates
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 84
RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is:
· Not driven within a traffic lane. · Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
· Driven in a narrow lane.
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
RDM On and Off
Left Selector Wheel
When you turn the RDM on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch. 2. Roll the left selector wheel to the
symbol and push it. u The message appears on the driver
information interface when the system becomes on or off.
Safety Support Switch
The RDM is in the previously selected ON or OFF setting each time you turn the power system on.
1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the driver information interface or audio/information screen, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking.
2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after re-connecting the 12-volt battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
527
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
RDM Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Environmental conditions · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. · There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. · Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. · Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. · Reflections on the interior of the windshield. · Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
528
Driving
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Roadway conditions · Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). · Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. · Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings. · The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk). · The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. · The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. · The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. · Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. · When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines). · Driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions · Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. · The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc. · The inside of the windshield is fogged. · The camera temperature gets too high. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire*, etc.). · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. · When tire chains are installed.
Driving
* Not available on all models
529
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Traffic Sign Recognition System
Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit, your vehicle has just passed through, showing it on the driver information interface.
How the System Works
When the camera located behind the rearview mirror captures traffic signs while driving, the system displays the ones that are recognized as designated for your vehicle. The sign icon will be displayed until the vehicle reaches a predetermined time and distance.
The sign icon also may switch to another one or disappear when: · The other designated limit is detected. · You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.
1Traffic Sign Recognition System
Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted on roadsides should not be ignored. The system does not work on the designated traffic signs of all the countries you travel, nor in all situations. Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at speeds appropriate for the road conditions.
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield that could obstruct the camera's field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera's field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
Driving
530
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the image below may appear.
1Traffic Sign Recognition System
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera's sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears, the traffic sign recognition system does not work, and will be displayed.
· Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the air flow directed towards the camera.
· Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears, the traffic sign recognition system does not work, and will be displayed. Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving
Continued
531
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
The traffic sign recognition system may not be able to recognize the traffic sign in the following cases.
Vehicle conditions · Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. · The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. · The inside of the windshield is fogged. · There are portions remaining to be wiped. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire*, etc.). · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
1Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
When the traffic sign recognition system malfunctions, appears on the driver information interface. If this message does not disappear, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Environmental conditions · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. · When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels. · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · A vehicle in front of you is traveling flying up spray or snow.
Driving
532 * Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
The position or the condition of the traffic sign · A sign is hard to be found since it is in a complicated area. · A sign is located far away from your vehicle. · A sign is located where the beam of the headlight is hard to reach. · A sign is on a corner or bend in the road. · Faded or bent signs. · Rotated or damaged signs. · A sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost. · A part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or the sign itself is hidden by a vehicle
and others. · Light (a streetlight) or a shadow is reflected on the surface of the sign. · A sign is too bright or too dark (an electric sign). · A sign of a small size.
Other conditions · When you are driving at a high speed.
Driving
Continued
533
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
The traffic sign recognition system may not operate correctly, such as displaying a sign that does not follow the actual regulation for the roadway or does not exist at all in the following cases.
u A speed limit sign may display at a higher or lower speed than the actual speed limit.
· There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time, vehicle type, school zone, etc.
· Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric signs, numbers on the sign are blurred, etc.).
· A sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving even though it is not for the lane (speed limit sign situated at the junction between the side road and the main road, etc.).
· There are things that look similar to the color or shape of the recognition object (similar sign, electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).
· A truck or another large vehicle with a sticker of the speed limit sign on the back are traveling in front of you.
534
Driving
Signs Displayed on the Driver Information Interface
The speed limit sign icon is displayed on the right half of the screen. When main mode is selected
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
When main mode is not selected
Speed Limit Sign Speed Limit Sign
Driving
Selecting to display traffic signs when main mode is off You can continue displaying reduced-size traffic sign icon on the driver information interface even while the main mode is not selected.
2 Customized Features* P. 158, 372
* Not available on all models
535
uuHonda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera
Front Sensor Camera
The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC with Low Speed Follow, CMBSTM and traffic sign recognition system, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions.
Camera Location and Handling Tips
Front Sensor Camera
This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera's sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.
1Front Sensor Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the camera's field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera's field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.
Driving
536
uuHonda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera
1Front Sensor Camera If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears:
· Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.
· Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around the camera. If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears:
· Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
537
Driving
uuHonda Sensing®uRadar Sensor
Radar Sensor
The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.
Radar Sensor
1Radar Sensor Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover.
For the CMBSTM to work properly:
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by using the safety support switch and take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 493
If the vehicle is involved in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
· Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision · Your vehicle drives through deep water or is
submerged in deep water
· Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock,
or embankment that could jar the radar sensor
Driving
538
Braking
Brake System
Parking Brake
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.
To apply The electric parking brake can be applied any time the vehicle has battery, no matter which position the power mode is in.
Electric Parking Brake Switch
Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently and securely.
u The indicator in the switch comes on. u The parking brake indicator (red) comes
on.
1Braking When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a whirring sound from the engine compartment. This is because the brake system is in operation, and it is normal.
1Parking Brake You may hear the electric parking brake system motor operating from the rear wheel area when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.
The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric parking brake system operation when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the 12-volt battery goes dead.
2 Jump Starting P. 638
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels are applied by the electric servo brake system until the vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking brake then applies, and the switch should be released.
Driving
Continued
539
uuBrakinguBrake System
Electric Parking Brake Switch
To release The power mode must be in ON in order to release the electric parking brake. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
u The indicator in the switch goes off. u The parking brake indicator (red) goes
off.
Manually releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and smoothly when facing down hill on steep hills.
1Parking Brake
In the following situations, the parking brake automatically operates.
· When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes
while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.
· When the driver's seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
· When the power system is turned off while ACC
with Low Speed Follow is activated.
· When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
· When the driver's seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped and the automatic brake hold is applied.
· When the power system is turned off while the
automatic brake hold is applied.
· When there is a problem with the automatic brake
hold system while brake hold is applied.
Driving
540
uuBrakinguBrake System
Automatic parking brake feature operation If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated: · The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF. · To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake indicator
(red) is on.
2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 542
To release automatically Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake. Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal. When on a hill, it may require more accelerator input to release.
u The indicator in the switch goes off. u The parking brake indicator (red) goes
off.
1Parking Brake If the parking brake cannot be released automatically, release it manually.
When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator pedal may need to be pressed farther to automatically release the electric parking brake.
The parking brake cannot be released automatically while the following indicators are on:
· Malfunction indicator lamp · Transmission system indicator
The parking brake may not be released automatically while the following indicators are on:
· Brake system indicator · VSA® system indicator · ABS indicator · Supplemental restraint system indicator
Accelerator Pedal
You can release the parking brake automatically when: · You are wearing the driver's seat belt. · The power system is on. · The transmission is not in (P or (N.
Driving
Continued
541
uuBrakinguBrake System
Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or deactivate the automatic parking brake feature. 1. Put the transmission into (P. 2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the parking brake switch.
u Check that the parking brake indicator (red) has come on. 3. Pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound,
release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again. 4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the
switch. u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated. u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated. u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will
remain applied after you turn off the engine. u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake
indicator (red) is on.
1Parking Brake In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in place if applied.
When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and make sure the automatic parking brake feature is deactivated.
Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyortype car wash or when having your vehicle towed, deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and leave the parking brake released.
If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature for when putting your vehicle through a conveyor type car wash, you can follow the procedure explained below. 1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop. 2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within 2 seconds push down the
parking brake switch. u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected. u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both
ACC with Low Speed Follow and the automatic brake hold system. u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake
indicator (red) is on.
Driving
542
uuBrakinguBrake System
Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 548 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 547
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.
Applying constant pressure to the brakes while going down a long hill can cause the brakes to heat up, resulting in a loss of stopping power. Therefore, when descending a long hill, release the accelerator pedal and allow regenerative braking to slow the vehicle down. To adjust the rate of deceleration, use the deceleration paddle selector.
2 POWER/CHARGE Gauge P. 135 2 High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
P. 134 2 Deceleration Paddle Selector P. 470
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
Driving
Continued
543
uuBrakinguBrake System
Automatic Brake Hold
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic.
Turning on the system Activating the system
Canceling the system
Comes On
Automatic Brake Hold Button
Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the power system. Press the automatic brake hold button. The automatic brake
hold system indicator comes on. The system is turned on.
Brake Pedal
On
Comes On
U.S.
Comes On
Canada
On
Goes Off
Accelerator Pedal
Depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. The transmission must be in (D or (N. The automatic brake
hold indicator comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10 minutes. Release the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.
Depress the accelerator pedal while the transmission must be in (D. The system is canceled and the vehicle starts to move.
The automatic brake
hold indicator goes
off. The system
continues to be on.
1Automatic Brake Hold
3 WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system on steep hills or slippery roads may still allow the vehicle to move if you remove your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from moving when stopped on a steep hill or slippery roads.
3 WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to park the vehicle may result in the vehicle unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is temporarily kept by automatic brake hold and always park the vehicle by putting the transmission in (P and applying the parking brake.
Driving
544
uuBrakinguBrake System
The system automatically cancels when: · You engage the parking brake. · You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into (P or (R.
The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when: · Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes. · The driver's seat belt is unfastened. · The power system is turned off. · There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.
1Automatic Brake Hold While the system is activated, you can turn off the power system or park the vehicle through the same procedure as you normally do. 2 When Stopped P. 549
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated, the automatic brake hold turns off once the power system is off.
Driving
Continued
545
uuBrakinguBrake System
Turning off the automatic brake hold system
While the system is on, press the automatic
brake hold button again.
Goes
u The automatic brake hold system
Off
indicator goes off.
Automatic Brake Hold Button
If you want to turn off automatic brake hold while the system is in operation, press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.
1Turning off the automatic brake hold system Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold system before using an automated car wash.
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold system is in operation.
Driving
546
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the wrong size or type.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as "stomp and steer."
ABS operation You may hear an operating noise when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: · Wet or snow covered roads. · Roads paved with stone. · Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:
· You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow.
· The tires are equipped with tire chains.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:
· Motor sounds coming from the engine
compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the power system has been turned on and while the vehicle accelerates.
· Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates. These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.
Driving
547
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking. Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking. When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
548
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully. 3. Change the shift position to (P. 4. Turn off the power system.
1Parking Your Vehicle
3 WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.
Always confirm the electric parking brake is set, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift position indicator.
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE The following can damage the driveline:
· Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
· Changing to (P before the vehicle stops
completely.
When facing uphill, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. Doing so may cause the power system to overheat and fail.
Driving
Continued
549
uuParking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped
1When Stopped
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.
Driving
550
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
Cross Traffic Monitor*
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.
1Cross Traffic Monitor*
3 CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing.
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
551
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
How the System Works
The system activates when: · The power mode is in ON. · The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 553 2 Customized Features P. 372
· The transmission is in (R. · Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.
Radar sensors: Underneath the rear bumper corners
When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle.
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.
1Cross Traffic Monitor*
Cross traffic monitor may not detect or may delay alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without an approaching vehicle under the following conditions:
· An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,
near your vehicle's rear bumper, is blocking the radar sensor's scope.
· Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph
(5 km/h) or higher.
· A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than
between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25 km/h).
· The system picks up external interference such as
other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
· Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with
snow, ice, mud or dirt.
· When there is bad weather. · Your vehicle is on an incline. · Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear. · Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a
vehicle, and so on.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.
Driving
552 * Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
When the System Detects a Vehicle
Arrow Icon
Normal View
Wide View
Top Down View
An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the information screen.
Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
You can switch the system on and off from the customized feature on the information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 372
1When the System Detects a Vehicle
If the on the lower right changes to in amber when the transmission is in (R, mud, snow or ice, etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean the area if necessary.
If the comes on in amber when the transmission is in (R, there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If the display remains the same with the transmission in (R, there may be a problem with the rear camera system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Icon
Driving
553
Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle's rear view. The display automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into (R.
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Approx. 39 inches (1 m) Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Guidelines
Wide View Mode Normal View Mode
Camera
Bumper
Top Down View Mode
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
Models with Display Audio
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline* settings.
2 Customized Features P. 372
Fixed Guideline ON: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R. OFF: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline* ON: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. OFF: Guidelines do not move.
Driving
554 * Not available on all models
uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
You can view three different camera modes on the audio/information screen.
Models with color audio
Press the LIST/SELECT (selector) knob or preset 1 button to switch the mode. : Wide view mode : Normal view mode : Top down view mode
Models with Display Audio
Touch the appropriate icon to switch the mode. : Wide view mode : Normal view mode : Top down view mode
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Models with color audio
You can change the Camera Guideline settings. Camera Guideline On: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R. Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Models with color audio
· If the last used viewing mode was Wide or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R.
· If you were using Top down view mode before you turned the power mode to OFF, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R.
· If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of (R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R.
Driving
Continued
555
uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Models with Display Audio
· If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R.
· If you were using Top down view mode before turning off the power system, the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R, the view mode you were using just before using Top down view mode (Wide view mode or Normal view mode) will be activated.
· If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of (R, the view mode you were using just before selecting Top down view mode (Wide view mode or Normal view mode) will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R.
556
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
Fuel recommendation Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.
Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today's advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
1Fuel Information
NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.
Fuel tank capacity: 10.6 US gal (40 L)
Driving
557
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
How to Refuel
Fuel Fill Door Release Button Fuel Fill Cap
558
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.
2. Put the transmission into (P. 3. Turn the power system off. 4. Press the fuel fill door release button.
u Please Wait appears for a few seconds on the driver information interface.
5. When the message changes to Ready, the fuel fill door automatically opens. u You can now unscrew the fuel cap and start refueling.
6. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a release of air, wait until this stops, then turn the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
1How to Refuel
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
· Turn the power system off, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
· Handle fuel only outdoors. · Wipe up spills immediately.
This vehicle has a pressurized fuel system. When the fuel vapor pressure inside the fuel tank is high, it takes about 10 seconds for the vehicle to vent the fuel tank. Once the pressure is vented, the driver information interface changes from Please Wait to Ready.
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.
Holder
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Fuel Fill Cap
7. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder. 8. Insert the fuel filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically. This leaves space in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands with a change in the temperature.
9. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening it until you hear it click at least once. u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
If the fuel fill door does not open after you press the button, even after the display changes to Ready, you can manually open the door.
2 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 658
An internal valve automatically closes after 30 minutes from the moment you press the fuel fill door release button. When it does, do not continue to refuel as fuel may spill out.
When the fuel fill door automatically opens, a vent valve in the fuel system also opens to allow the air and the vapors being displaced by the fuel to escape. This valve automatically closes, however, if the refueling is not completed within 30 minutes. If this happens, reinstall the fuel cap, close the fuel fill door, and then follow these steps again to restart the system.
Driving
559
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface. · Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 574
· Maintain the specified tire pressure. · Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. · Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven 100
Gallons of fuel
Liters of fuel
Miles per Gallon
Kilometers driven
L per 100 km
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Driving
560
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 562 Safety When Performing Maintenance ...563 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 564
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 565 Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood.. 572 Opening the Hood ........................... 573 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 574 Oil Check ......................................... 575 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 576 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 577
Cooling System................................ 579 Inverter Coolant............................... 581 Transmission Fluid............................ 582 Brake Fluid....................................... 583 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 584 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 585 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades .......................................... 589 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 592 Tire and Loading Information Label .. 593 Tire Labeling .................................... 593 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) .. 595
Wear Indicators ............................... 597 Tire Service Life................................ 597 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 598 Tire Rotation.................................... 599 Winter Tires ..................................... 600 12-Volt Battery ................................. 601 Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Button Battery ........... 603 Climate Control System Maintenance ..604 Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 605 Exterior Care.................................... 607 Accessories and Modifications ........ 611
561
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.
Periodic inspections · Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake Fluid P. 583
· Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 592
· Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 585
· Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 589
1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are "certified" to EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 569
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 671
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.
Maintenance
562
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.
Maintenance Safety
· To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the 12-volt battery, all High Voltage system, and all fuel related parts.
· Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.
· To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
· Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the 12-volt battery or compressed air.
· Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner's manual.
Maintenance
Continued
563
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Vehicle Safety
· The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the power system is turned off.
· Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the power system including the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.
· Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not activate the power system unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts. When the power mode is on, the engine can automatically start, or the radiator fan may start operating without the engine running.
· Do not touch the high-voltage battery and wiring (orange).
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
564
Maintenance
Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
565
Maintenance
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the driver information interface. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time. 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (home) button. 3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed. 4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance screen. The engine oil life
appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.
Engine Oil Life
(home) Button Left Selector Wheel
Main Item
Sub Item
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0
Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 569
Maintenance
566
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface
Maintenance Message --
Oil Life Display
Explanation
When you select the Maintenance screen, it displays codes for maintenance items due at the next engine oil change, along with the percentage of engine oil life remaining.
Information --
Maintenance Due Soon
15 %
The engine oil life indicator starts to appear along with other due-soon maintenance item codes when the remaining oil life drops to 15 percent.
The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life.
Maintenance
Continued 567
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Message Maintenance Due Now
Oil Life Display 5 %
5 %
Explanation
Information
The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Press the (home)
end of its service life, and the
button to switch to another display. maintenance items should be inspected
and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance Past Due
Negative Distance
The engine oil has passed its service The engine oil life has passed.
life, and a negative distance appears The maintenance items must be
after driving over 10 miles (U.S.
inspected and serviced immediately.
models) or 10 km (Canadian
models). The negative distance on
the display blinks.
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
Maintenance
568
Maintenance Service Items
System Message Indicator
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Minder Message
1Maintenance Service Items
· Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Main Item
Sub Items
U.S. models
CODE A B
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check expiry date for tire repair kit bottle Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA®) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system# Inspect fuel lines and connections#
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 668.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Maintenance
CODE 1 2
3 4
5 7
Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Replace transmission fluid*4 Replace spark plugs Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace brake fluid*5
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 47,500 miles or 3 years (76,000 km or 3 years).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
Continued
569
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Canadian models
CODE
Maintenance Main Items
A Replace engine oil*1
0 Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
*1: If a Maintenance Minder Message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 47,500 miles or 3 years (76,000 km or 3 years). *5: If a Maintenance Minder Message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years. # : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 668.
1Maintenance Service Items
· Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3
if they are noisy.
CODE 1 2
3 4
5 7 9
Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Replace transmission fluid*4 Replace spark plugs Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace brake fluid*5 Service front and rear brakes Check expiry date for tire repair kit bottle Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system # Inspect fuel lines and connections #
Maintenance
570
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Resetting the Display
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.
(home) Button
Left Selector Wheel
1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (home) button. 3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed. 4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance screen. 5. Press the left selector wheel to enter the reset mode. 6. Roll the left selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All
Due Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process). 7. Press the left selector wheel to reset the selected item. 8. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.
Models with color audio system
You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the customized features on the driver information interface.
2 Customized Features* P. 158
Models with Display Audio
You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 372
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
571
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Engine Oil Fill Cap Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange) Washer Fluid (Blue Cap) Radiator Cap
572
12-Volt Battery (In the Center Console)
Brake Fluid (Black Cap)
Inverter Coolant Filler Tank
Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle Pull
Lever
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the driver's side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.
3. Push the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) to the side and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Maintenance
Support Rod
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
Grip
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
Clamp
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.
573
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.
Genuine Engine Oil
Commercial Engine Oil
Honda Genuine Motor Oil
Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the container.
1Recommended Engine Oil Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.
The following seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute's latest requirements.
Maintenance
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Temperature
*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.
Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.
574
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Turn off the power system. You can check the oil level without the engine having run beforehand. If the engine has been running, wait approximately three minutes before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Upper Mark Lower Mark
Maintenance
575
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
Engine Oil Fill Cap
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.
Maintenance
576
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Turning the power system on automatically starts the engine if the High Voltage battery charge level gauge shows two segments or less.
2 High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge P. 134
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver
information interface.
Under Cover
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the Phillips-head screws and
slotted head screws by turning 90°
Screw
counterclockwise on the undercarriage and remove the under cover.
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Washer
Drain Bolt
Maintenance
Continued
577
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
Oil Filter
578
5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque: 30 lbfft (40 Nm, 4.0 kgfm)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 3.5 US qt (3.3 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduCooling System
Cooling System
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
Reserve Tank
Reserve Tank
MAX MIN
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. u If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
1Cooling System
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
NOTICE Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Maintenance
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.
Continued
579
uuMaintenance Under the HooduCooling System
Radiator
Radiator Cap
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.
1Radiator
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.
Maintenance
580
uuMaintenance Under the HooduInverter Coolant
Inverter Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the inverter coolant level every time you refuel.
Have a dealer replace the inverter coolant.
Checking the Coolant
Filler Tank
MAX
MIN
1. Check the fluid level in the tank. 2. If the coolant level has dropped below the
MIN level, have your vehicle serviced at a dealer. u Only a properly trained technician can
refill the coolant and check the system for leaks.
1Inverter Coolant
NOTICE Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about 31°F (35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the motor components.
Maintenance
581
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary. Do not attempt to check or change the transmission fluid yourself.
1Transmission Fluid
NOTICE Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle limited warranty.
Maintenance
582
Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Checking the Brake Fluid
Brake Reserve Tank MAX
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank.
MIN
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
1Brake Fluid NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.
Maintenance
583
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Open the cap and check the amount of window washer fluid. If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
Canadian models
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface.
All models
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid. Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale build up.
Maintenance
584
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlights
Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Fog Lights*
Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
1Headlights
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
Front Turn Signal, Parking/Daytime Running and Front Side Marker Lights
Front turn signal, parking/daytime running and front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*
Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
585
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Bolts
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver or socket to remove the bolts.
2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
Maintenance
Bulb Socket
3. Turn the socket counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb. 5. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on
the body. 6. Align the pins with the body grommets,
then push in until they fully seat.
Brake and Rear Side Marker Lights
Brake and rear side marker Lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
586
uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillights
Taillights
Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Back-Up Light: 16 W
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
1Back-Up Light Bulbs When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift and remove the clip.
Clip
Holding Clip
Bulb
Socket
2. Turn the socket counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is flat.
Push until the pin is flat.
Maintenance
587
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light
Rear License Plate Light
Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
High-Mount Brake Light
High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
588
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. 2. While holding the wiper switch in the
MIST position, set the power mode to ON, then to VEHICLE OFF. u Both wiper arms are set to the
maintenance position as shown in the image.
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.
3. Lift both wiper arms.
Maintenance
Continued
589
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Wiper Arm
4. Press up on and hold the tab, then slide the holder off the wiper arm.
Holder Tab
Wiper Blade
5. Pull the end of the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow in the image until it is out of the holder's end cap.
End cap at the bottom
Wiper Blade
6. Pull the wiper blade in the opposite direction to slide it out of the holder.
Maintenance
Holder
590
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Holder Cap
Wiper Blade
7. Insert the flat side of the new wiper blade onto the bottom part of the holder. Insert the blade all the way.
8. Install the end of the wiper blade into the cap.
9. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm until it locks.
10. Lower both wiper arms. 11. Set the power mode to ON and hold the
wiper switch in the MIST position until both wiper arms return to the standard position.
Maintenance
591
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the driver's doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.
1Checking Tires
3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Maintenance
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare*. Even tires in good condition can lose 12 psi (1020 kPa, 0.10.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: · Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. · Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. · Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. · Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 597
· Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
592 * Not available on all models
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 478
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.
Models with optional spare tire
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver's doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.
Label Example
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the driver's doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
Tire Labeling
Example
Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described as shown.
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure Tire Size
Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. P235/60 R18 102T P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 235: Tire width in millimeters. 60: Aspect ratio (the tire's section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 18: Rim diameter in inches. 102: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).
Continued
Maintenance
593
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year Week
Maintenance
594
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Maintenance
Continued
595
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Maintenance
596
Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear Indicator mark
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare*, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
597
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire's sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn't possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.
Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner's manual.
Maintenance
598
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
1Tire Rotation Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Front
Front
Direction Mark
Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 478
Maintenance
599
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
1Winter Tires
3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires: · Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. · Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: · Install them on the front tires only. · Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032
· Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
· Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. · Drive slowly.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.
NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.
Maintenance
600
12-Volt Battery
Checking the 12-Volt Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead: · The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 242
· The clock resets.
2 Clock P. 170
Canadian models
· The immobilizer system needs to be reset.
2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 99
112-Volt Battery
3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.
WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
Maintenance
601
uu12-Volt BatteryuCharging the AGM Battery
Charging the AGM Battery
AGM labeled batteries like those installed in your vehicle require a compatible charger to be properly charged. Damage to the battery can result if the battery is charged improperly or with the wrong equipment. For more information on how to charge your vehicle's AGM battery, consult a dealer.
112-Volt Battery
3 WARNING
· Use of a battery not designed for this vehicle could cause a hydrogen gas leak inside the vehicle, resulting in a fire or explosion that may cause injury or death.
· Only install a 12V AGM battery designed for use in this vehicle.
· Contact your Honda dealer for more information.
The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Maintenance
602
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery. Battery type: CR2032
1. Remove the built-in key.
Battery
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent scratching the smart entry remote. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the buttons.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.
1Replacing the Button Battery
3 WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children. If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.
NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.
Maintenance
603
Climate Control System Maintenance
Air Conditioning
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.
Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
1Air Conditioning
NOTICE Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
Refrigerant in your vehicle's air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.
The air conditioner label is found under the hood: 2 Safety Labels P. 82 2 Specifications P. 662
Canadian models
: Caution : Flammable Refrigerant
Maintenance
: Requires Registered Technician to Service
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust. 604
: Air Conditioning System
1Dust and Pollen Filter If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Loop
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
1Cleaning the Window Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor*.
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
Continued
605
uuCleaninguInterior Care
Floor Mats
Unlock Lock
The driver's floor mat hooks over floor anchors, which keep them from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.
Maintaining Genuine Leather*
To properly clean leather: 1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust. 2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap. 3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth. 4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
1Maintaining Genuine Leather*
It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.
Maintenance
606 * Not available on all models
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.
Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: · If driving on roads with road salt. · If driving in coastal areas. · If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Using an Automated Car Wash
· Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. · Fold in the door mirrors. · For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.
Air Intake Vents
If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the windshield, first set the wiper arms to the maintenance position.
2 Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber P. 589
Using High Pressure Cleaners
· Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. · Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. · Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
1Using an Automated Car Wash
When using an automated car wash that pulls the vehicle through with a conveyor, make sure vehicle is in car wash mode.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 467
Maintenance
Continued
607
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle's paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle's paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.
1Applying Wax
NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.
Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.
Maintenance
608
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights. Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction. However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
Continued
609
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Painting the Vehicle
Refer to the temperature notice label affixed to the driver's doorjamb before painting the vehicle.
1Painting the Vehicle
U.S. models
Canadian models
Maintenance
610
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following: · Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions. · Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle's airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy. · Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 651
· Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications
3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding accessories and modifications.
3 WARNING
Use of improperly designed, engineered or manufactured high-voltage battery assemblies could cause a fire in your vehicle.
A vehicle fire could result in a crash or injury.
Only use a genuine Honda high-voltage battery assembly, or its equivalent, in your vehicle.
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
Maintenance
611
uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle's electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.
Do not modify or attempt to repair your vehicle's high-voltage hybrid power system or otherwise modify vehicle electrical systems. Disassembling or modifying electrical equipment can result in a crash or a fire.
If you ever need to replace your vehicle's high-voltage battery assembly outside of warranty coverage, we highly recommend that you only use a genuine Honda highvoltage battery assembly. Genuine Honda high-voltage battery assemblies are designed to work with your vehicle's hybrid power system and have been designed, engineered and manufactured to avoid overcharging situations. Non-genuine highvoltage battery assemblies may not have been similarly designed, engineered and manufactured, and installation of such assemblies could result in overcharging, fires, loss of power, or other conditions that may increase the likelihood of a crash or injury.
612
Maintenance
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools Types of Tools .................................. 614
If a Tire Goes Flat
Models with optional spare tire
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 615 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire....... 621 Power System Won't Start Checking the Procedure ................... 635 If the Remote Battery is Weak .......... 636 Emergency Power System Off........... 637 Jump Starting.................................... 638 Overheating How to Handle Overheating............. 641
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears ...643 If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On ....................... 644 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 645 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks..................................... 646 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On.... 647 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On......................... 648
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ....................... 649
If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message...... 650
Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 651 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 656
Emergency Towing........................... 657 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill
Door................................................. 658 When You Cannot Open the Trunk ... 659
613
Tools
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools The tools are stored in the trunk.
Handling the Unexpected
Tool Case
Models with optional spare tire
Tool Case
614
Box Wrench Wrench Shaft
Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle
Jack
Jack Handle Bar
Box Wrench Wrench Shaft
If a Tire Goes Flat
Models with optional spare tire
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Put the transmission into (P. 3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
1Changing a Flat Tire Follow compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
NOTICE Do not use the jack if it doesn't work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
615
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
Handling the Unexpected
Spare Tire
Tool Case
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. 3. Take the jack, wheel nut wrench and jack
handle bar out of the tool case. 4. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Wheel Blocks The tire to be replaced.
616
6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
617
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
How to Set Up the Jack
1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.
1How to Set Up the Jack
3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.
Jacking Points
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.
Jacking Point
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight ("load") or may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely:
· Do not use while the power system is on. · Use only where the ground is firm and level. · Use only at the jacking points. · Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. · Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
Handling the Unexpected
Jack Handle Bar
618
Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Replacing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 80 lbfft (108 Nm, 11 kgfm)
Continued
619
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Storing the Flat Tire
Spacer Cone Wing Bolt
Center Cap
For
For
compact full-size
spare tire tire
1. Remove the center cap.
1Storing the Flat Tire
3 WARNING
Loose items can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash and could seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench back in the tool case. Store the case in the trunk.
Handling the Unexpected
TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire Pressure Monitor System Problem. Check Tire Pressure. See Your Dealer. will appear on the driver information interface and the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on; however, this is normal and is no cause for concern.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 478
620
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise severely damaged, you will need to have the vehicle towed. If the tire only has a small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can use the temporary tire repair kit so that you can drive to the nearest service station for a more permanent repair.
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking brake.
2. Put the transmission into (P. 3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
The kit should not be used in the following situations. Instead, contact a dealer or roadside assistance to have the vehicle towed.
· The tire sealant has expired. · More than one tire is punctured. · The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm). · The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is
outside the contact area.
Contact Area
When the puncture is: Use Kit
Smaller than 3/16 inch (4 mm)
Yes
Larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm)
No
· Damage has been caused by driving with the tires
extremely under inflated.
· The tire bead is no longer seated. · The rim is damaged.
Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be able to repair the puncture using the kit.
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
621
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
Power Plug Instruction Manual
1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire Repair notification label and speed restriction label are applied to the side of temporary tire repair kit.
When making a temporary repair, carefully read the instruction manual provided with the kit.
Air Only Side Selector Knob Pressure Gauge Pressure Relief Button
Repair Notification Label
Sealant/Air Hose Sealant/Air Side Inflator Switch
Speed Restriction Label
U.S.
Canada
U.S. Canada
Handling the Unexpected
622
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
1. Open the trunk floor lid. 2. Take the kit out of the case. 3. Place the kit face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do not place the kit on its side.
Tire Repair Kit
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
623
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Injecting Sealant and Air
Valve Cap
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Sealant/Air Hose
Valve Stem
2. Remove the sealant/air hose from the packaging.
1Injecting Sealant and Air
3 WARNING
Tire sealant contains substances that are harmful and can be fatal if swallowed.
If accidentally swallowed, do not induce vomiting. Drink plenty of water and get medical attention immediately.
For skin or eye contact, flush with cool water and get medical attention if necessary.
Sealant/Air Hose
3. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.
In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily. In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before using.
The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away any spills immediately.
Handling the Unexpected
Valve Stem
624
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
U.S. Canada
4. Plug in the compressor to the accessory power socket. u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a door or window.
5. Turn the power system on. u Keep the power system on while injecting sealant and air.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 81
6. Turn the selector knob to REPAIR*1, SEALANT/AIR*2, PRODUIT ANTIFUITE/ AIR*2.
1Injecting Sealant and Air
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even death. Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
NOTICE Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit compressor for more than 15 minutes. The compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged.
Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than actual. After the sealant injection is complete the pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air compressor off only after the sealant injection is complete.
*1: U.S. models *2: Canadian models
Continued
625
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Pressure Gauge ON OFF
Sealant/Air Hose
7. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit. u The compressor starts injecting sealant and air into the tire. u When the sealant injection is complete continue to add air.
8. Models with 215/55R16 93V tires After the air pressure reaches front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230 kPa), turn off the kit.
Models with 215/50R17 91H tires
After the air pressure reaches front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa), turn off the kit. u To check the pressure, occasionally turn
off the compressor and read the gauge. 9. Unplug the power plug from the accessory
power socket. 10. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
1Injecting Sealant and Air If the required air pressure is not reached within 10 minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for the kit to provide the necessary seal, and your vehicle will need to be towed.
See a Honda dealer for a replacement sealant bottle and proper disposal of an empty bottle.
Valve Stem
Handling the Unexpected
626
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
11. Press the pressure relief button until the gauge returns 0 psi (0 kPa).
Pressure Relief Button Repair Notification Label
U.S.
Canada
12. Apply the repair notification label to the flat surface of the wheel. u The wheel surface must be clean to ensure the label adheres properly.
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
627
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
U.S. Canada
1. Apply the speed restriction label to the location as shown.
2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes. u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
3. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Speed Restriction Label
4. Recheck the air pressure using the sealant/ air hose on the compressor.
Sealant/Air Hose
Handling the Unexpected
628
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
U.S. Canada
5. Turn the selector knob to AIR*1, AIR ONLY*2, AIR SEULEMENT*2. u Do not turn the air compressor on to check the pressure.
2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 632
6. If the air pressure is · Less than 25 psi (175 kPa): Do not add air or continue driving. The leak is too severe. Call for help and have your vehicle towed.
2 Emergency Towing P. 657
Models with 215/55R16 93V tires
· Front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230 kPa) or more:
Models with 215/50R17 91H tires
· Front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes or until you reach the nearest service station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure. If the air pressure does not go down after the 10 minute driving, you do not need to check the pressure any more.
*1: U.S. models *2: Canadian models
Continued
629
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
Models with 215/55R16 93V tires
· Greater than 25 psi (175 kPa), but less than front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230 kPa): Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230 kPa):
Models with 215/50R17 91H tires
· Greater than 25 psi (175 kPa), but less than front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa): Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa).
2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 632
Then drive carefully for 10 more minutes or until you reach the nearest service station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure. u You should repeat this procedure as long
as the air pressure is within this range. 7. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even death. Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
630
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
8. Press the pressure relief button until the gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
9. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
Pressure Relief Button
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
631
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured, under-inflated tire.
Sealant/Air Hose
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair
the Flat Tire P. 622
2. Remove the kit from the case.
3. Place the kit, face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.
4. Remove the sealant/air hose from the kit.
5. Remove the valve cap.
1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even death. Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
NOTICE Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit compressor for more than 15 minutes. The compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged.
Valve Cap Sealant/Air Hose
6. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.
Handling the Unexpected
Valve Stem
632
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
U.S. Canada
7. Plug in the kit to the accessory power socket. u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a door or window.
8. Turn the power system on. u Keep the power system on while injecting air.
2 Emergency Towing P. 657
9. Turn the selector knob to AIR*1, AIR ONLY*2, AIR SEULEMENT*2.
10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit. u The compressor starts to inject air into the tire.
11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.
Handling the Unexpected
*1: U.S. models *2: Canadian models
Continued
633
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Pressure Relief Button
12. Turn off the kit. u Check the pressure gauge on the air compressor. u If overinflated, press the pressure relief button.
13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power socket.
14. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
15. Press the pressure relief button until the gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
16. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
Handling the Unexpected
634
Power System Won't Start
Checking the Procedure
When the READY indicator does not come on and the Ready To Drive message does not appear on the driver information interface, check the following items and take appropriate action.
1Checking the Procedure
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 638
Checklist Check if the related indicator or driver information interface messages come on.
Check the brightness of the interior lights.
Check the transmission. Check the immobilizer system indicator.
Condition
What to Do
The Temperature Is Too Cold For Vehicle To Operate message appears.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 117
The To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears.
uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.
2 If the Remote Battery is Weak P. 636
2 POWER Button Operating Range P. 196
The POWER SYSTEM indicator comes on.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
The transmission system indicator blinks and Transmission System Problem. Apply Parking Brake When Parked. See
2 If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message
Your Dealer. message appears.
P. 650
The interior lights are dim or do not come on at all.
Have the 12-volt battery checked by a
dealer.
The interior lights come on normally.
Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 656
The transmission is not in (P.
Put the transmission into (P.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the power system cannot be turned on.
2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 99
Handling the Unexpected
635
Handling the Unexpected
uuPower System Won't StartuIf the Remote Battery is Weak
If the Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the driver information interface, and the POWER button flashes, the READY indicator does not come on. Turn on the power system as follows:
1. Touch the center of the POWER button with the H logo on the remote while the POWER button is flashing. The buttons on the remote should be facing you. u The POWER button flashes for about 30 seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the POWER button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the POWER button changes from flashing to on. u The READY indicator comes on. u If you don't depress the pedal, the mode will change to ACCESSORY.
636
uuPower System Won't StartuEmergency Power System Off
Emergency Power System Off
The POWER button may be used to turn the power system off due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must turn the power system off, do either of the following operations: · Press and hold the POWER button about for two seconds. · Firmly press the POWER button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the power system disables the power assist the power system provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place. The transmission automatically changes to (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Then, the power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
1Emergency Power System Off
Do not press the POWER button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the power system to be turned off. If you press the POWER button while driving, the beeper sounds.
Handling the Unexpected
637
Jump Starting
Handling the Unexpected
Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the power system, then open the hood.
1. Push the tabs to open the jump start box cover.
1Jump Starting
3 WARNING
A 12-volt battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.
Tab
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the 12-volt battery.
Booster Battery
Jump Start Box + Terminal
2. Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle's jump start box + terminal as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
3. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. u When using an automotive battery charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15-volt. Check the charger manual for the proper setting.
4. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.
You cannot use the terminal to jump start another vehicle or to charge the 12-volt battery.
638
uuJump Startingu
Engine Mounting Bolt
5. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
6. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine and increase its rpm slightly.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
1Jump Starting
12-volt battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
639
uuJump Startingu
What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's jump start box + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
1What to Do After the Engine Starts
The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicles stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after re-connecting a battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
Handling the Unexpected
640
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows: · Engine Temperature Too Hot. Do Not Drive. Allow Engine To Cool.
message appears on the driver information interface. · Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the power system on and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the power system and wait until it
subsides. Then open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
641
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
Next thing to do
Reserve Tank
MAX
MIN
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and turn the power system off once the Engine Temperature Too Hot. Do Not Drive. Allow Engine To Cool. message disappears. u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately turn the power system off.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.
1How to Handle Overheating
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.
Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, turn the power system on. If the Engine Temperature Too Hot. Do Not Drive. Allow Engine To Cool. message does not appear, resume driving. If it appears again, contact a dealer for repairs.
Handling the Unexpected
642
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears
Reasons for the warning to appear Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. What to do as soon as the warning
appears 1. Immediately park the vehicle on level
ground in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights
on. What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Turn the power system off and let it sit for
approximately three minutes. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
2 Oil Check P. 575
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure warning. u The warning disappears: Start driving again. u The warning does not disappear within 10 seconds: Immediately turn the power system off and contact a dealer for repairs.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears
NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
Handling the Unexpected
643
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On
If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the 12-volt battery is not being charged. What to do when the indicator comes on Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
1If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the power system. The power system uses the 12-volt battery to activate. You may not be able to turn the power system on again if you have turned it off with this indicator on.
Handling the Unexpected
644
Handling the Unexpected
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink · Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. · Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
The message appears on when: An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being loose or not being installed. What to do when the message appears: 1. Turn the power system off. 2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once. 3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off. When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described above.
645
Handling the Unexpected
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks
U.S. Canada (Red)
Reasons for the indicator to come on · The brake fluid is low. · There is a malfunction in the brake system. What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. · If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. · If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using regenerative braking. Reason for the indicator to blink · There is a problem with the electric parking brake system. What to do when the indicator blinks Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work. Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 647
If you repeatedly operate the electric parking brake in a short period of time, the brake stops operating to prevent heating of the system and the indicator blinks. It returns to its original state in approximately 1 minute.
646
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System
Indicator (Amber) Comes On
U.S. Canada
If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, release the parking brake manually or automatically.
2 Parking Brake P. 539
(Red) U.S. Canada
· If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer immediately. u Preventing the vehicle from moving Put the transmission into (P.
· If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
1 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able to release it.
If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake system indicator (amber) come on at the same time, the parking brake is working.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work because it is checking the system.
(Amber)
Handling the Unexpected
647
Handling the Unexpected
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on · Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. · If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate. What to do when the indicator comes on · Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn on the power system again. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
648
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. If the compact spare tire* is installed, the indicator will either come on or it will first blink for about one minute, then stay on. What to do when the indicator comes on Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 478
If the compact spare tire* causes the indicator to come on, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS. What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire* causes the indicator to first blink, and then stay on, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
Handling the Unexpected
* Not available on all models
649
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message
If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message
Reasons for the indicator to blink The transmission is malfunctioning.
1If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message You may not be able to turn on the power system.
What to do when the indicator blinks · Immediately have your vehicle inspected by
a dealer.
Make sure to set the parking brake when parking your vehicle.
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
2 Emergency Towing P. 657
Handling the Unexpected
650
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type A
Located near the washer fluid. Push the tabs to open the box. Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.
Tab
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
651
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
Circuit Protected
Amps
-
MAIN FUSE IG MAIN 1
150 A
4
30 A
- FUSE BOX 2
SUB FAN MTR
30 A
FUSE BOX 1
1
IG MAIN 2
30 A
5
IGPS
OP FUSE MAIN
30 A
6
VBU
ESB
40 A
7
IG HOLD1
ENG EWP
30 A
8
PCU EWP
WIPER MOTOR
30 A
9
IGP
R/M 2
30 A
10
BACK UP
P-ACT
2
R/M 1
30 A
11
30 A
12
IGPS (LAF) EVTC
COOLING FAN
30 A
13
HAZARD
EPS
70 A
14
IG COIL
BLOWER MOTOR
40 A
15
DBW
ABS/VSA MOTOR
40 A
16
STOP LIGHTS
FUSE BOX OPTION*
(40 A)
17
-
3
ABS/VSA FSR
40 A
18
-
PREMIUM AUDIO*
(30 A)
19
AUDIO
REAR DEFROSTER
40 A
20
FR FOG LIGHT*
Amps 30 A 30 A 40 A 60 A 7.5 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 15 A 10 A 7.5 A 20 A 10 A 15 A 15 A 10 A
- - 15 A (15 A)
Circuit Protected
21 AS P/SEAT RECLINING*
22
AS P/SEAT SLIDE*
23
HORN
24
WASHER
25
SHIFTER
26
SMART
27
-
28
P-ACT UNIT
29
IGB
30
-
Amps (20 A) (20 A) 10 A 15 A 10 A 10 A
- 10 A 10 A
-
Handling the Unexpected
652 * Not available on all models
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Engine Compartment Fuse
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
Amps
Box Type B
Circuit Protected
Amps
2
BATT SNSR
7.5 A
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number. Push
1
the tabs to open the box.
PTC2 PTC4
- - -
40 A
3
40 A
4
40 A
5
40 A
6
40 A
7
- - AUDIO SUB* - RR H/SEAT*
(7.5 A) -
(7.5 A) -
(15 A)
-
30 A
Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type B
Tab
Handling the Unexpected
* Not available on all models
Continued 653
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Interior Fuse Box Type A
Located on 12-volt battery in the center console.
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
Amps
1
BATTERY FUSE
175 A
12-Volt Battery
Replacement of this fuse should be done by a dealer.
Handling the Unexpected
654
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Interior Fuse Box Type B
Located under the dashboard. Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
Fuse Label
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
1
ACC
2
-
3
BATT ECU
4
SHIFTER
5
OPTION
6
P-ACT
7
METER
8
FUEL PUMP
9
AIRCON
10
-
11
IG1 MON
12 R SIDE DOOR LOCK
13 L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK
14
RR L P/W
15
AS P/W
16
DOOR LOCK
17
VBSOL
18
-
19
SUNROOF*
Amps 10 A
- 10 A 5 A 10 A 5 A 10 A 15 A 10 A
- 5 A 10 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 7.5 A - (20 A)
Circuit Protected
20
ESB
21
ACG
22
DRL
23
-
24
-
25
DR DOOR LOCK
26 R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK
27
RR R P/W
28
DR P/W
29
FR ACC SOCKET
30
OPTION
31
DR P/SEAT REC*
32
FR SEAT HEATER*
33
DR P/SEAT SLI*
34
ABS/VSA
35
SRS
36
HAC OP
37
BATT FAN
38 L SIDE DOOR LOCK
39 DR DOOR UNLOCK
Amps 5 A 10 A 7.5 A - -
(10 A) 10 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 10 A 10 A 20 A 15 A 10 A 10 A
Handling the Unexpected
* Not available on all models
655
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Combined Fuse
Blown Fuse
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover. 3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one.
Fuse Puller
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.
5. Check the large fuse in the vehicle interior. u If the fuse is blown, use a phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one.
6. Inspect the small fuses in the vehicle interior. u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage. Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.
2 Fuse Locations P. 651
There is a fuse puller on the back of the cover of the engine compartment fuse box type A.
Handling the Unexpected
656
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight.
Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.
Make sure the parking brake is released. If you cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must be transported by the flat bed equipment.
2 Parking Brake P. 539
NOTICE Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.
Handling the Unexpected
657
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot open the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Pull the release lever to the right.
u The fuel fill door unlocks.
3. Open the fuel fill door.
2 How to Refuel P. 558
4. Add fuel very slowly.
u The automatic fuel tank vent valve does
Release lever
not operate when the fuel fill door is opened manually. Trying to add fuel too
rapidly when the vent valve is closed will
cause fuel vapors to be pushed out the
filler pipe and can cause a small amount
of liquid fuel to be spilled onto the
ground.
1When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.
3 WARNING
Gasoline vapors in tank are under pressure. · If using the manual fuel door release,
open the cap slowly to gradually release pressure. · Stop the engine, and keep all sparks, heat, and flame away.
The automatic fuel tank vent does not operate when using the manual fuel door release. Gradually release pressure by slowly turning the fuel fill cap to the left. If you hear a release of air, wait until it stops, then continue to slowly remove the fuel fill cap.
Handling the Unexpected
658
When You Cannot Open the Trunk
What to Do When Unable to Open the Trunk
If you cannot open the trunk, use the following procedure. 1. Remove the built-in key from the remote. 2. Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in key. Put it into the cover (as shown in the image) and remove the cover.
Cover
1When You Cannot Open the Trunk
Following up: After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.
3. Pull the trunk release lever toward you. u The trunk unlocks and opens.
Trunk Release lever
Handling the Unexpected
659
660
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 662 Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, Motor Number, and Transmission Number..................... 664
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 665 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 666
Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 667
Warranty Coverages ........................ 668 Authorized Manuals......................... 671 Customer Service Information......... 672
661
Specifications
Vehicle Specifications
Model
INSIGHT
No. of Passengers:
Front
2
Rear
3
Total
5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle Weight See the certification label on the driver's
Rating
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front)
See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear)
See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb
Engine Specifications
Displacement
91.38 cu-in (1,498 cm3)
Spark Plugs
NGK
DILZKAR7C11H
Fuel
Type Fuel Tank Capacity
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher 10.6 US gal (40 L)
Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type Charge Quantity Lubricant Type Quantity
HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) 13.9 15.7 oz (395 445 g) ND-OIL11 (POE) 7.3 8.2 cu-in (120 135 cm3)
Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam) Headlights (High Beam) Fog Lights* Parking/Daytime Running Lights Front Turn Signal Lights Front Side Marker Lights Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors)* Brake Lights Rear Turn Signal Lights Taillights/Rear Side Marker Lights Taillights Back-Up Lights High-Mount Brake Light Rear License Plate Light Interior Lights
Map Lights Ceiling Light Ambient Lights Vanity Mirror Lights Trunk Light
LED LED LED LED LED LED
LED
LED 21 W (Amber) LED LED 16 W LED LED
8 W 8 W LED 2.3 W 5 W
Information
662 * Not available on all models
uu Specifications u
Brake Fluid
Specified
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Transmission Fluid
Specified
Honda ATF DW-1
Capacity
Change
2.3 US qt (2.2 L)
Engine Oil
Recommended
Capacity
·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20 ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 L) Change including 3.5 US qt (3.3 L) filter
Engine Coolant
Specified Ratio
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.22 US gal (4.61 L) (change including the remaining 0.14 US gal (0.52 L) in the reserve tank)
Inverter Coolant
Specified
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Tire
Size
Regular
Pressure
Front
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) Rear
Compact Spare*3
Size Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Wheel Size Regular Compact Spare*3
*1: Models with 16 inch wheel *2: Models with 17 inch wheel *3: Vehicles with optional spare tire
215/55R16 93V*1 215/50R17 91H*2 35 (240 [2.4]) 33 (230 [2.3])*1 32 (220 [2.2])*2 T125/80D16 97M
60 (420 [4.2])
16 x 7J*1 17 x 7J*2 16 x 4T
Information
663
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, Motor Number, and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicle's VIN, engine number, motor number, and transmission number are shown as follows.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, Motor Number, and Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Motor Number Transmission Number
Certification Label/Vehicle Identification Number
Cover
Information
664
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:
As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
665
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.
In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.
666
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle's emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the 12-volt battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1Testing of Readiness Codes The readiness codes are erased when the 12-volt battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for six hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C). 4. Turn the power system on. 5. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds). 6. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. 7. Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for six hours.
Information
667
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicle's emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Accessory Limited Warranty Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.
668
Information
Replacement 12-Volt Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle's original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use.
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Continued
669
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.
Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
EPA Contact Information An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Director, Light-Duty Vehicle Center, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Attention: Warranty Claim 2000 Traverwood Drive, Ann Arbor, MI 48105; complianceinfo@epa.gov
670
Information
Authorized Manuals
Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options. For U.S. Owners Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1(800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com. For Canadian Owners Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
671
Information
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following information:
· Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, Motor Number, and Transmission Number P. 664
· Date of purchase · Odometer reading of your vehicle · Your name, address, and telephone number · A detailed description of the problem · Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546
Information
672
Disclaimer of Pandora®*
Requirements to access Pandora® · Latest version of the Pandora app
installed on your Android, Blackberry, or iPhone. · Registered Pandora account (you can create a free account at www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/> or on your smartphone) · Connection to the internet via Wi-Fi or cellular data network.
Limitations · Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection · Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without notice · Certain functionality of Pandora service is not available when accessing the service through this system including, but not limited to, creating new stations, deleting stations, emailing current stations, buying tracks, viewing additional text information, logging in to Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality. Pandora internet radio is a music service not affiliated with HONDA. More information is available at http:// www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. · Mobile access requires a smartphone with an active data plan. Standard data rates may apply. · Pandora is only available in the United States.
* Not available on all models
uuCustomer Service Informationu
673
Information
Index
Index
Index
Numbers
12-Volt Battery.................................... 12, 601 Charging System Indicator ................. 92, 644 High Voltage ..................................... 12, 486 Jump Starting .......................................... 638 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ........ 601 Maintenance (Replacing).......................... 603
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 547 Accessories and Modifications ................. 611 Accessory Power Socket ........................... 228 Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System ............ 474 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)......... 101, 102 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
with Low Speed Follow .......... 101, 102, 499 Additives
Coolant ................................................... 579 Engine Oil................................................ 574 Washer.................................................... 584 Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 574 Adjusting Armrest ................................................... 221 Front Seats .............................................. 214 Head Restraints........................................ 219 Mirrors .................................................... 212 Rear Seats................................................ 217 Steering Wheel ........................................ 211 Adjusting the Sound................................. 252 Agile Handling Assist................................ 477
674
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System) ...................................... 232 Changing the Mode ................................ 234 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows............................................... 235 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 604 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 234 Sensors ................................................... 238 Synchronized Mode................................. 237 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 232
Air Pressure....................................... 593, 663 Airbags........................................................ 53
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 59 After a Collision ........................................ 56 Airbag Care............................................... 67 Event Data Recorder.................................... 0 Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 56 Indicator.............................................. 64, 95 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ......... 65 Sensors ..................................................... 53 Side Airbags .............................................. 61 Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 63 AM/FM Radio.................................... 254, 296 Android Auto ........................................... 334 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 547 Indicator.................................................... 95 Apple CarPlay ........................................... 331 Armrest ..................................................... 221 Audio Remote Controls ........................... 243 Audio System.................................... 240, 247 Adjusting the Sound........................ 252, 290
AM/FM Radio.......................................... 254 Audio/Information Screen ............... 248, 269 Display Setup .................................. 253, 291 Error Messages ....................................... 338 General Information................................ 343 Home Screen .......................................... 277 How to Update Wirelessly ....................... 284 How to Update with a USB Device .......... 288 How to use Siri Eyes Free ................ 267, 330 iPod ................................................ 256, 311 Limitations for Manual Operation............ 292 MP3/WMA/AAC ............................. 261, 314 Pandora® .............................................. 259 Playing Bluetooth® Audio........................ 264 Reactivating ............................................ 242 Remote Controls..................................... 243 Security Code ......................................... 242 Selecting an Audio Source ...................... 292 Status Area ............................................. 282 System Updates ...................................... 284 Theft Protection ...................................... 242 USB Flash Drives...................... 261, 314, 344 USB Ports................................................ 241 Wallpaper Setup ............................. 250, 275 Audio/Information Screen ............... 248, 269 Authorized Manuals ................................ 671 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 185 Customize ...................................... 164, 389 Auto High-Beam ...................................... 204 Indicator ................................................... 98
Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 544 Indicator ........................................... 88, 544
Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator ........................................... 88, 544
Automatic Intermittent Wipers .............. 208 Automatic Lighting.................................. 201 Average Fuel Economy ............................ 141 Average Fuel Economy Records .............. 154 Average Speed ......................................... 143
B
Belts (Seat).................................................. 46 Beverage Holders..................................... 226 Blind spot information System................ 483 Bluetooth® Audio............................. 264, 317 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ........... 395, 420 Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 80 Brake System ............................................ 539
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 547 Automatic Brake Hold............................. 544 Brake Assist System................................. 548 Fluid ....................................................... 583 Foot Brake .............................................. 543 Indicator ............................. 85, 86, 646, 647 Parking Brake.......................................... 539 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 210 Bulb Replacement.................................... 585 Back-Up Light ......................................... 587 Brake and Rear Side Marker Lights .......... 586 Fog Lights ............................................... 585
Front Turn Signal, Parking/Daytime Running and Front Side Marker Lights ... 585
Headlights ............................................... 585 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 588 Rear License Plate Lights .......................... 588 Rear Turn Signal Light.............................. 586 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 585 Taillights .................................................. 587 Bulb Specifications ................................... 662
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 81 Carrying Cargo.................................. 449, 451 Certification Label .................................... 664 Changing Bulbs......................................... 585 Charging System Indicator ................. 92, 644 Child Safety................................................. 68
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 184 Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 188 Child Seat .................................................... 68 Booster Seats............................................. 80 Child Seat for Infants ................................. 70 Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 71 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt .................................................. 75 Larger Children.......................................... 79 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 70 Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 72 Using a Tether ........................................... 77
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 184 Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 607 Cleaning the Interior................................ 605 Climate Control System............................ 232
Changing the Mode ................................ 232 Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 235 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 604 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 234 Sensors ................................................... 238 Synchronized Mode................................. 237 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 232 Clock.......................................................... 170 CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM)................................................. 490 Coat Hooks ............................................... 229 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ................................................. 490 Compact Spare Tire .......................... 615, 663 Console Compartment ............................. 225 Controls..................................................... 169 Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 579 Adding to the Radiator............................ 580 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 579 Overheating ............................................ 641 Cooling System ......................................... 579 Adding to the Radiator............................ 580 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 579 Overheating ............................................ 641 Creeping ................................................... 462 Cross Traffic Monitor ............................... 551
Index
675
Cup Holders............................................... 226 Customer Service Information ................. 672 Customized Features ................ 158, 365, 372
D
Daytime Running Lights........................... 203 Dead Battery ............................................. 638 Deceleration Paddle Selector................... 470 Defaulting All the Settings ...................... 391 Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows.................................................. 235 Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 665 Dimming
Headlights ............................................... 200 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 212 Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 575 Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 199 Display Setup ............................................ 253 Door Mirrors ............................................. 213 Doors ......................................................... 172 Auto Door Locking .................................. 185 Auto Door Unlocking............................... 185 Door and Trunk Open Message ................. 45 Keys ........................................................ 172 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside..................................................... 182 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside.................................................. 175 Lockout Prevention System ...................... 181 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 595
Driver Attention Monitor ........................ 149 Driver Information Interface ................... 136
Switching the Display .............................. 136 Warning and Information Messages ........ 107 Driving ...................................................... 447 Braking ................................................... 539 Shifting Gear........................................... 463 Transmission ........................................... 462 Turning on the Power.............................. 454 Driving Support Information................... 152 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 604
E
Eco Assist® System ...................................... 18 Eco Drive Display/Drive Cycle Score/
Lifetime Points........................................ 155 ECON Mode .............................................. 473
Indicator.................................................. 100 Elapsed Time............................................. 143 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 95, 648 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 475 Emergency ................................................ 657 Emergency Power System Off ................. 637 Emergency Trunk Opener........................ 188 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 667 Engine ....................................................... 664
Coolant................................................... 579 Jump Starting.......................................... 638 Oil........................................................... 574
Starting................................................... 454 Engine Oil................................................. 574
Adding ................................................... 576 Checking ................................................ 575 Displaying Oil Life ................................... 566 Low Oil Pressure Warning ....................... 643 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 574 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ...... 648 EV Button ................................................... 14 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide).. 81 Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 607 Exterior Mirrors........................................ 213
F
Features .................................................... 239 Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 604 Oil .......................................................... 577 Flat Tire..................................................... 615 Floor Mats ................................................ 606 Fluids Brake ...................................................... 583 Engine Coolant ....................................... 579 Inverter Coolant ...................................... 581 Windshield Washer ................................. 584 FM/AM Radio ................................... 254, 296 Fog Lights ................................................. 203 Indicator ................................................... 98 Folding Down the Rear Seat ................... 217 Foot Brake ................................................ 543
Index
676
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 56 Front Seat Heaters ................................... 230 Front Seats
Adjusting ................................................ 214 Front Sensor Camera ............................... 536 Fuel ..................................................... 33, 557
Economy................................................. 560 Gauge .................................................... 133 Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 141 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 94 Range ..................................................... 141 Recommendation.................................... 557 Refueling ................................................ 557 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions............ 560 Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 33, 558 Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 33, 558 Unable to Unlock .................................... 658 Fuses ......................................................... 651 Inspecting and Changing ........................ 656 Locations ........................................ 651, 655
G
Gasoline (Fuel) Economy................................................. 560 Gauge .................................................... 133 Information............................................. 557 Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 141 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 94 Refueling ................................................ 557
Gauges...................................................... 133
Glass (care) ........................................ 605, 608 Glove Box .................................................. 224
H
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 613 HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ....................... 395, 420
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History ........... 410, 429
Automatic Transferring ............................ 428 Caller's ID Information ............................. 407 Displaying Messages ................................ 439 Favorite Contacts..................................... 430 HFL Buttons ..................................... 395, 420 HFL Menus ...................................... 397, 423 HFL Status Display ........................... 396, 422 In Case of Emergency ...................... 323, 443 Limitations for Manual Operation .... 396, 422 Making a Call .................................. 414, 432 Options During a Call ...................... 419, 435 Phone Setup .................................... 401, 425 Receiving a Call ............................... 418, 435 Receiving a Text Message ........................ 437 Ring Tone ........................................ 407, 428 Selecting a Phone .................................... 438 Speed Dial ............................................... 411 To Clear the System................................. 409 To Set Up a Text Message Options........... 436 Hazard Warning Button............................... 6 HD RadioTM................................................ 299 Head Restraints......................................... 219
Headlights................................................. 200 Auto High-Beam System.......................... 204 Automatic Operation............................... 201 Dimming ......................................... 200, 203 Operating................................................ 200
Heaters (Seat) ................................... 230, 231 HFL (HandsFreeLink®)....................... 395, 420 High Beam Indicator .................................. 98 High Voltage Battery ............................... 486 High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge...................................................... 134 Hill Start Assist System ............................. 459 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 392 Honda App License Agreement .............. 345 Honda Sensing® ................................ 34, 487 HondaLink® ............................................. 319 Hybrid Vehicle
SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi-Mode Drive) ................................... 11
I
Identification Numbers Engine and Transmission ......................... 664 Vehicle Identification ............................... 664
Illumination Control Dial ......................................................... 210
Immobilizer System .................................. 189 Indicator.................................................... 99
Index
677
Index
Indicators..................................................... 84 12-Volt Battery Charging System ....... 92, 644 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (Amber)............................ 101 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (Green) ............. 102, 500 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 95 Auto High-Beam........................................ 98 Automatic Brake Hold........................ 88, 544 Automatic Brake Hold System............ 88, 544 Blind spot information System ................. 484 Deceleration Paddle Selector...................... 92 ECON Mode .................................... 100, 473 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System .. 95, 648 EV ............................................................. 90 EV Mode ................................................... 90 Fog Light ................................................... 98 High Beam................................................. 98 Immobilizer System.................................... 99 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Amber) ................................................. 102 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Green) .......................................... 102, 519 Lights On................................................... 98 Low Fuel.................................................... 94 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 97, 478, 481 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 91, 645 Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) ........................................... 86, 647 Parking Brake and Brake System (Red)........................................ 85, 646, 647
678
POWER SYSTEM........................................ 89 READY ...................................................... 90 Safety Support (Amber) ........................... 103 Safety Support (Green/Gray).................... 106 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 47, 94 Security System Alarm ............................... 99 Shift Position ............................................. 92 SPORT Mode ................................... 100, 469 Supplemental Restraint System............ 64, 95 System Message...................................... 100 Transmission System.................................. 93 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 98 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF .. 96, 476 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System ............................................ 96, 475 Information .............................................. 661 Instant Fuel Economy............................... 141 Instrument Panel ........................................ 83 Brightness Control................................... 210 Interior Lights ........................................... 222 Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 212 Inverter Coolant ....................................... 581 iPad ........................................................... 344 iPhone ....................................................... 344 iPod ........................................... 256, 311, 344
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 618 Jump Starting ........................................... 638
K
Key Number Tag ...................................... 173 Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 181 Keys........................................................... 172
Lockout Prevention ................................. 181 Number Tag............................................ 173 Rear Door Won't Open ........................... 184 Remote Transmitter ................................ 179 Types and Functions................................ 172
L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ........ 517 Language (HFL) ........................................ 422 LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 73 Left Selector Wheel ................................. 158 Lights ................................................ 200, 585
Automatic............................................... 201 Bulb Replacement ................................... 585 Daytime Running Lights .......................... 203 Fog Lights ............................................... 203 High Beam Indicator ................................. 98 Interior.................................................... 222 Light Switches......................................... 200 Lights On Indicator.................................... 98 Turn Signals ............................................ 199 Load Limits ............................................... 451 Locking/Unlocking ................................... 172 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 185 Childproof Door Locks ............................ 184 From Inside ............................................. 182
From Outside .......................................... 175 Keys........................................................ 172 Using a Key............................................. 180 Lockout Prevention System ..................... 181 Low Battery Charge ................................. 644 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 94 Low Oil Pressure Warning ....................... 643 Low Remote Signal Strength .................. 174 Lower Anchors ........................................... 73 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit)............. 451
M
Maintenance .................................... 145, 561 Battery.................................................... 601 Brake Fluid.............................................. 583 Cleaning ................................................. 605 Climate Control System .......................... 604 Coolant .................................................. 579 Maintenance MinderTM............................ 565 Oil .......................................................... 575 Precautions ............................................. 562 Radiator.................................................. 580 Remote Transmitter ................................ 603 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 585 Safety ..................................................... 563 Service Items........................................... 569 Tires........................................................ 592 Transmission Fluid................................... 582 Under the Hood...................................... 572
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 91, 645
Map Lights ................................................ 223 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 451 Meters, Gauges ......................................... 133 Mirrors....................................................... 212
Adjusting................................................. 212 Door........................................................ 213 Exterior.................................................... 213 Interior Rearview ..................................... 212 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 611 Moonroof.................................................. 195 MP3 ................................................... 261, 314 MP3/WMA/AAC ........................................ 314 Multi-View Rear Camera .......................... 554
N
Navigation ................................................ 144 Numbers (Identification) .......................... 664
O
Odometer.................................................. 138 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 574
Adding .................................................... 576 Checking ................................................. 575 Displaying Oil Life .................................... 566 Low Oil Pressure Warning ........................ 643 Oil Life..................................................... 145 Recommended Engine Oil........................ 574 Viscosity .................................................. 574 Open Source Licenses ............................... 359
Opening Trunk ...................................................... 659
Opening/Closing Hood....................................................... 573 Moonroof ............................................... 195 Power Windows ...................................... 192 Trunk ...................................................... 186
Outside Temperature Display.................. 139 Overheating.............................................. 641
P
Pandora® ................................................. 259 Panic Mode ............................................... 191 Parking...................................................... 549 Parking Brake ........................................... 539 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............................. 86, 647 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) .......................... 85, 646, 647 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ....... 65 Passing Indicators ..................................... 200 Phone ........................................................ 146 Playing Bluetooth® Audio................ 264, 317 POWER Button ......................................... 196 Power Flow Monitor ................................ 157 Power Windows ....................................... 192 POWER/CHARGE Gauge........................... 135 Precautions While Driving ....................... 460
Rain ........................................................ 460 Pregnant Women ....................................... 51
Index
679
Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 615
R
Radar Sensor ............................................. 538 Radiator..................................................... 580 Radio (AM/FM).......................................... 296 Radio (FM/AM).......................................... 254 Radio (SiriusXM®)...................................... 300 Radio Data System (RDS).................. 255, 298 Range ........................................................ 141 RDS (Radio Data System).................. 255, 298 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 667 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button...................................................... 209 Rear Seat (Folding Down) ........................ 217 Rear Seat Heaters ..................................... 231 Rearview Mirror........................................ 212 Refueling................................................... 557
Fuel Gauge .............................................. 133 Gasoline .......................................... 557, 662 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 94 Regulations ............................... 481, 595, 665 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback ................................................. 456 Remote Transmitter.................................. 179 Replacement Battery..................................................... 603 Bulbs ....................................................... 585 Fuses ............................................... 651, 655 Tires ........................................................ 598
Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 589 Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 666 Resetting a Trip Meter ..................... 139, 141 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 525
On and Off.............................................. 527
S
Safe Driving ................................................ 41 Safety Check ............................................... 45 Safety Labels............................................... 82 Safety Message............................................. 3 Safety Support.......................................... 153 Seat Belts .................................................... 46
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 50 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 48 Checking................................................... 52 Fastening .................................................. 49 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt.................................................. 75 Pregnant Women ...................................... 51 Reminder .................................................. 47 Warning Indicator ............................... 47, 94 Seat Heaters...................................... 230, 231 Seats .......................................................... 214 Adjusting ................................................ 214 Front Seats .............................................. 214 Rear Seats ............................................... 217 Seat Heaters.................................... 230, 231 Security System......................................... 189 Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 99
Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 99 Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 72 Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 247 Shift Buttons ...................................... 30, 463
Operation ............................................... 465 Shift Position Indicator .............................. 92 Shifting (Transmission) ............................ 463 Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 50 Side Airbags ............................................... 61 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 63 Siri Eyes Free..................................... 267, 330 SiriusXM® Radio ....................................... 300 Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System..................................................... 175 Snow Tires ................................................ 600 Spare Tire ......................................... 615, 663 Spark Plugs ............................................... 662 Specifications ........................................... 662 Specified Fuel ................................... 557, 662 Speedometer............................................ 133 SPORT Mode............................................. 469
Indicator ................................................. 100 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 56 Steering Wheel
Adjusting ................................................ 211 Stopping ................................................... 549 Summer Tires............................................ 600 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 56 Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................ 6, 7, 196 System Message Indicator ....................... 100
Index
680
System Updates........................................ 284
T
Temperature Outside Temperature Display .................. 139
Temperature Sensor ........................ 139, 238 Temporary Tire Repair Kit ....................... 622 Time (Adjusting) ...................................... 170 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..................................................... 478
Indicator ........................................... 97, 649 Tires .......................................................... 592
Air Pressure..................................... 593, 663 Checking and Maintaining ...................... 592 Inspection ............................................... 592 Labeling.................................................. 593 Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 615 Regulations............................................. 595 Rotation.................................................. 599 Spare Tire ....................................... 615, 663 Summer.................................................. 600 Temporary Tire Repair Kit........................ 622 Tire Chains.............................................. 600 Wear Indicators....................................... 597 Winter .................................................... 600 Tools ......................................................... 614 Towing a Trailer....................................... 453 Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 453 Emergency.............................................. 657
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) .................................................... 478 Indicator ............................................ 97, 649
Traffic Sign Recognition System .............. 530 Transmission ............................................. 463
Automatic ............................................... 463 Creeping ................................................. 462 Gear Position Indicator .............................. 92 Number ................................................... 664 Shift Operation ........................................ 465 Shifting ................................................... 463 Transmission System Indicator .................................................... 93 TRIP Button ............................................... 138 Trip Computer .................................. 140, 142 Trip Meter ................................. 139, 141, 143 Troubleshooting ....................................... 613 Blown Fuse ...................................... 651, 655 Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 37 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 37 Emergency Towing .................................. 657 Noise When Braking ............................ 38, 39 Overheating ............................................ 641 Power System Won't Start ....................... 635 Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 615 Rear Door Won't Open ...................... 37, 184 Warning Indicators .................................... 84 Trunk ......................................................... 186 Lid ........................................................... 186 Light Bulb ................................................ 662 Unable to Open ....................................... 659
Turn Signals .............................................. 199 Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 98
Turning on the Power.............................. 454 Jump Starting.......................................... 638
U
Unlocking the Doors ................................ 175 Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside ......................................................... 24 USB Flash Drives ....................... 261, 314, 344 USB Ports................................................... 241 Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System ............................................ 175
V
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 9 Vehicle Identification Number ................ 664 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) .............. 475
Off Button............................................... 476 Off Indicator.............................................. 96 System Indicator........................................ 96 Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 574, 663 Voice Control Operation.......................... 293 Voice Portal Screen.................................. 294 Voice Recognition ................................... 293 VSA® (Vehicle Stability AssistTM) .............. 475
W
Wallpaper ......................................... 250, 275
Index
681
Warning and Information Messages ....... 107 Warning Indicator On/Blinking................ 643 Warning Labels ........................................... 82 Warnings ................................................... 145 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately)............................................... 668 Watts ......................................................... 662 WAV .......................................................... 261 Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 597 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle)............ 618 Wi-Fi Connection ...................................... 328 Window Washers...................................... 207
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 584 Switch ..................................................... 207 Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 192 Windshield Cleaning.......................................... 605, 608 Defrosting/Defogging .............................. 235 Washer Fluid............................................ 584 Wiper Blades ........................................... 589 Wipers and Washers ................................ 207 Winter Tires Snow Tires............................................... 600 Tire Chains .............................................. 600 Wipers and Washers ................................. 207 Automatic Intermittent Wipers................. 208 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 589 WMA ................................................. 261, 314 Worn Tires................................................. 592
682
Index
31TXM620 OM-13769 0 0 X 31-T X M- 6 2 0 0
owners.honda.com (U.S.) honda.ca (Canada)
2021 Honda Insight Owner's Manual © 2020 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. -- All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.